Autodesk Inventor 8

®

Essentials

Official Training Courseware

52708-010000-1710A

January 23, 2004

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of this product at the time of its publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D Props, 3D Studio, 3D Studio MAX, 3D Studio VIZ, 3DSurfer, ActiveShapes, ActiveShapes (logo), Actrix, ADI, AEC Authority (logo), AEC-X, Animator Pro, Animator Studio, ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Map, Autodesk, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk (logo), Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk University (logo), Autodesk View, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP, AutoSketch, Biped, bringing information down to earth, CAD Overlay, Character Studio, Cinepak, Cinepak (logo), Codec Central, Combustion, Design Your World, Design Your World (logo), Discreet, EditDV, Education by Design, gmax, Heidi, HOOPS, Hyperwire, i-drop, Inside Track, Kinetix, MaterialSpec, Mechanical Desktop, NAAUG, ObjectARX, PeopleTracker, Physique, Planix, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), RadioRay, Revit, Softdesk, Texture Universe, The AEC Authority, The Auto Architect, VISION*, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual TugBoat, Visual LISP, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP! (logo). The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3ds max, AutoCAD Architectural Desktop, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk Map, Autodesk Streamline, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, Buzzsaw.com, Cinestream, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Web Format, DWF, DWG Linking, DXF, Extending the Design Team, GDX Driver, gmax (logo), gmax ready (logo),Heads-up Design, IntroDV, jobnet, ObjectDBX, onscreen onair online, Plans & Specs, Plasma, PolarSnap, ProjectPoint, Reactor, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Visual Bridge, Visual Syllabus, and Where Design Connects.

Autodesk Canada Inc. Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc. in the USA and/or Canada, and/or other countries: discreet, fire, flame, flint, flint RT, frost, glass, inferno, MountStone, riot, river, smoke, sparks, stone, stream, vapour, wire. The following are trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc., in the USA, Canada, and/or other countries: backburner, backdraft, MultiMaster Editing.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright © 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright © 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright © 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System © 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright © 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE ® and other Pantone, Inc., trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. Portions Copyright © 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Typefaces from the Bitstream ® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust © 1996. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Contents
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Starting an Autodesk Inventor Design Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Autodesk Inventor Workflow Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Autodesk Inventor Workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Part Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Assembly Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Presentation Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Drawing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Using Templates Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Projects in Autodesk Inventor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Project Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Project Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Project Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Creating Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Editing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Exercise: Projects in Autodesk Inventor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 The User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 The Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 The Panel Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Keyboard Shortcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 3D Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Exercise: The User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Online Help and Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Help Topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 How To Popups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 What's New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Visual Syllabus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Help For AutoCAD Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Autodesk Online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Exercise: Online Help and Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Challenge Exercise: Introducing the Modeling Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Creating Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Sketch Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Sketch Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

i

Rules for Creating Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Sketch Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Precise Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Editing Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Sketch Doctor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Exercise: Creating Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Constraining Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Constraining Sketches in Autodesk Inventor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Geometric Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Planning Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Showing and Deleting Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Show All Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Use Construction Geometry in the Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Exercise: Constraining Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Dimensioning Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Parametric Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Driven Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Additional Options for Applying Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Automatic Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Displaying Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Guidelines for Dimensioning Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Exercise: Dimensioning Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Chapter 3: Creating Simple Sketched Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Introduction to Sketched Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simple Sketched Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Consumed and Unconsumed Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sketches and Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Sketch Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Introduction to Sketched Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Sketch Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Sketch Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Part Face to Define a Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Model Edge Referencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Reference Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Working with Sketch Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Extruded Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Extruded Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Extrude Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feature Relationships - Join, Cut, and Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Creating Extruded Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Revolved Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Revolved Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Revolve Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 133 134 136 137 139 140 141 143 145 148 152 153 154 155 159 160 163 165 166 167 168

ii

Contents

Feature Relationships - Join, Cut, and Intersect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Editing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Exercise: Creating Revolved Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Challenge Exercise: Creating Simple Sketched Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Default Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 The Work Plane Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Examples of Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Work Plane Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Exercise: Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Work Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Default Work Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 The Work Axis Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Example of Work Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Work Axis Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Exercise: Work Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Work Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Center Point Work Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 The Work Point Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Grounded Work Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Additional Examples of Work Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Exercise: Work Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Work Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Fillet Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 The Fillet Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Exercise: Fillet Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Chamfer Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 The Chamfer Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Exercise: Chamfer Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Hole and Thread Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 The Hole Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Thread Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Exercise: Hole and Thread Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Shell Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 The Shell Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Exercise: Shell Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Pattern Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 The Rectangular Pattern Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 The Circular Pattern Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 Exercise: Pattern Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Face Drafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

iii

The Face Draft Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Face Drafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Using Color Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Using Color Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Creating and Using Color Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Placed Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

266 269 270 271 273 274 275

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Introduction to Assembly Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Modeling Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Panel Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Introduction to Assembly Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In-Place Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visibility Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Resequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assembly Restructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Browser Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Browser Display Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enabled Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grounded Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Design Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Assembly Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Place Component Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sources of Placed Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dragging Components into an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Placing Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Parts in Place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Work Features in Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using 2D Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Projected Edges and Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Creating Components in an Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Degrees of Freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unconstrained Drag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constrained Drag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constraint Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving and Rotating Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Moving Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Constraining Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 279 285 286 287 288 289 291 292 292 295 296 297 298 299 301 302 303 305 307 309 312 313 314 318 319 321 324 325 326 328 328 329 332 334 335 336 340 344

iv

Contents

Editing Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Using ALT-Drag to Place Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Exercise: Constraining Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Adaptive Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Introduction to Adaptive Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Methods for Creating Adaptive Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Adaptive Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Adaptive Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Adaptive Occurrence in Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 Applying Assembly Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Tips and Considerations for Using Adaptivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362 Exercise: Adaptive Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Assembly Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 The Analyze Interference Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 The Analyze Faces Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Locating Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Exercise: Assembly Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Creating a Presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 Creating Tweaks and Trails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Animating a Presentation View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Exercise: Presentations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Challenge Exercise: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Setting Drafting Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Drafting Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Text Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399 Dimension Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402 Drawing Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Exercise: Setting Drafting Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 Drawing Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Editing the Default Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Using a Sheet Format for Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Creating Multiple Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Creating Sheet Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 Defining a Border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417 Defining a Title Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Editing Title Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Exercise: Drawing Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Projected Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425 Creating a Base View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Creating Projected Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 Editing Projected Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Exercise: Projected Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435 Creating Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

v

Assembly Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detail Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Detail Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Detail Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Auxiliary Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Auxiliary Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Auxiliary Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Broken Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Broken Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Broken Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Broken Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Break Out Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Break Out Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Break Out Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Break Out Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Views and Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copy Views between Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving Views between Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Managing Views and Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning a Drawing View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Retrieving Model Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: Dimensioning a Drawing View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Annotation Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating Centerlines and Center Marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Notes and Leaders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Balloons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise: General Annotation Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

441 443 445 446 447 450 451 452 453 456 459 460 461 463 464 465 466 469 470 471 472 476 477 478 479 480 481 486 490 491 492 500 507 511 516 521 522 523

Chapter 8: Project Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Irrigation Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526

vi

Contents

Preface .

Windows NT 4. and to encourage self-learning through the use of the Autodesk Inventor Design Support System (DSS). The integrated Design Support System (DSS) provides you with ongoing support as well as access to online documentation. Note Instructor-led training in either short or long courses is an effective method to learn computer application software.0/Windows 2000. 2 Preface . This manual is part of the Autodesk Official Training Courseware (AOTC) series designed primarily for instructorled classes. and a working knowledge of parametric solid modeling concepts. Each exercise is taskoriented and is based on real-world examples of mechanical engineering. It is recommended that you have a working knowledge of Microsoft Windows 98.Preface Preface Preface Introduction Welcome to Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials Courseware. 2D Drafters wanting to learn the basics of 3D design techniques are also encouraged to attend this course. Each chapter in this manual has instructional design so that it is easy to follow and understand. it can also be used for self-paced learning. you will be able to: Prerequisites This course is designed to teach new users of Autodesk Inventor the essential elements of using Autodesk Inventor 8 for Mechanical Design. a training manual for use in Authorized Training Centers and in corporate training and classroom settings. The primary objectives of the manual are to help you become productive quickly with the features and functionality of Autodesk Inventor 8. Although this manual is designed to be used as a teaching tool for instructor-led courses. Course Objectives At the end of this course. or Windows XP. Autodesk Inventor is designed for easy learning.

Inc. Tips provide special information that will enhance your productivity within the topic. Tip Notes can contain information that provides guidelines. constraints or warnings about the topic. Topics. Provides an introduction to the chapter theme and states specific learning objectives for the chapter. Note Exercise Data Files Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Prerequisite and Summary. All Rights Reserved 3 . • Notes and Tips Throughout this courseware. Concepts. Summary. Summarizes the chapter. there are Notes and Tips included for special attention. Objectives.Chapter Flow • • Introduction and Objectives. Each chapter is a collection of topics that together form the theme of the chapter. Each topic contains an Introduction.

To work on a different project.exe. you set a new project active in the Project Editor. When you attempt to open a file.Exercise Data Files The exercise data files for this manual are supplied in a self-installing file called Setup. By default. Each exercise has a project file that stores the paths to all the files related to the exercise. Autodesk Inventor uses projects to help organize related files and maintain links between files. browse to the root directory of the CD and double-click Setup. and each project may consist of a number of files. Autodesk Inventor uses the paths in the current project file to locate other necessary files. The Essentials folder contains the files necessary to complete each exercise in the training manual. the exercise files will be installed to the C:\Program Files\Autodesk\AOTC\Inventor 8\Essentials folder unless you use the Browse button to specify a different folder. 2. If the wizard does not automatically start. Insert the Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials CD-ROM into your computer and follow the instructions in the setup wizard. 4 Preface . Installing the Exercise Data Files To install the files: Step 1. 3. Projects Most engineers work on several projects at a time.exe on the Autodesk Inventor 8 Essentials CD attached to the back cover of your book. To accommodate this.

you will be able to. The online help and tutorials available for learning. • • Start an Autodesk Inventor design session. The typical workflow on a design session in Autodesk Inventor.. Identify the main interface components found in Autodesk Inventor software. The Browser. Create and edit project files for use in different environments and situations. The main interface components found in Autodesk Inventor software. • • • • • • • • • . and the types of files you can create and use with Autodesk Inventor software. • • In this chapter After completing this chapter. Different types of project files and the environments in which they should be used. different assembly modeling concepts... The help system and tutorials available to Autodesk Inventor users. Access the help system and other online resources for learning Autodesk Inventor software. and other interface features that are common to all Autodesk Inventor design environments. Create a design using various methods and workflows.Introduction to the Modeling Process Chapter Introduction In this chapter you learn about.. Panel Bar. The Design Support System or DSS. • • File types in Autodesk Inventor. Project files in Autodesk Inventor. Creating and editing project files.

6 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . workflow. Understand the typical design workflow when using Autodesk Inventor.Getting Started Overview Overview Overview In this lesson you will learn the Autodesk Inventor software interface. and file types. Objectives After completing this lesson. you will be able to: • • • • • Start an Autodesk Inventor design session. Understand the concept of Parametric Modeling. Understand how to use template files. Understand the available file types in Autodesk Inventor.

Each link • • Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Learn about constraints: This option launches a multi-media presentation that will teach you about constraints. Learn how to build models quickly: This option opens the main page to a series of helpful tutorials such as Using Constraints. and Advanced Topics. the open dialog box will appear showing the Getting Started screen with links to various resources. Creating a Part. Procedure Open Dialog Box . Inc. Learn about AutoCAD to Inventor Help: This option launches a help file specifically designed for AutoCAD users making the transition to Autodesk Inventor. All Rights Reserved 7 . Features include slide graphics with links to specific help files and other information related to the differences between the software applications. Creating Assemblies.Getting Started Pane Getting Started • • • See "What's New" in Autodesk Inventor: This link opens a help file containing all the new features in this release. this screen will present you with links to some helpful information. If you are new to Autodesk Inventor or if you have just upgraded to the most current release.Starting an Autodesk Inventor Design Session The first time you start an Autodesk Inventor design session. with focus on the Autodesk Inventor Projects help links. Learn about projects: This option presents the Autodesk Inventor Help Site Map.

in the What To Do area. Open Dialog Box .Open Pane Open In the Open dialog box. in the What To Do area. Metric Tab: Lists the available Metric Unit templates. • • • Default Tab: Lists the default templates based upon the default units type you select during installation. Open Dialog Box . click New and a list of all available templates for creating Autodesk Inventor files will be displayed.New Pane New In the Open dialog box. click Open and the three main areas of the Open dialog box will be displayed.presents a help topic with specific information on each project. 8 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . English Tab: Lists the available English Unit templates.

• More detailed information on Projects will follow later in this chapter. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Standard Windows Navigation Buttons: Autodesk Inventor uses standard Microsoft Windows®navigation tools in all of its file related dialog boxes. click Projects and Projects . Inc. Main Window: All files and folders contained in the selected location are listed in this window.Projects Pane Projects In the Open dialog box.• Locations: This window presents the folders defined in the active project file.Select a project file areas will be displayed. All Rights Reserved 9 . Project Definition Pane: This window displays the project categories and paths defined for each category. The active project will have a check mark next to the project name. Preview Window: This window will display a preview of the selected Autodesk Inventor file. in the What To Do area. • List of Available Projects: Double click on the project to make it active. The Project Location column displays the path where the project is stored. • • • Open Dialog Box . Each folder icon represents a shortcut you can select to list its files and subfolders.

they are stored as individual parameters which you can change at a later time. For example. After you create the sketch you place the required dimensions and the sketch geometry will update to reflect the dimension values you enter. you focus only on the shape of the sketch. Concept Another key aspect to Inventor is it ability to create adaptive parts. Adaptivity enables you to create dynamic relationships between parts in an assembly. when you create a 2D sketch in a parametric modeler. As opposed to non-parametric systems whose dimension values are representative of the size of the geometry.Autodesk Inventor Workflow Concepts Autodesk Inventor is a parametric modeler. the geometry to which it has been applied will also change to reflect the new value of the parameter. You do not need to draw your lines and circles at specific lengths or diameters. This means that the geometry is controlled by the parameters and/or constraints that you apply. Sketch . adaptive capabilities in Autodesk Inventor will enable the related parts to change without the need to create complex cross-part parametric equations. As you create these dimensions. If the parameter changes. When one part changes.Before and After Dimensions 10 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process .

Note: Is is possible to change these parameters to include formulas or use recognizable names such as Length and Width.The parametric capability then extends beyond the sketch level to the 3D feature level. The parametric capabilities are now extended to the assembly environment by using 3D Constraints to constrain the parts together. Constraint properties such as Offset and Angle values are stored as parameters within the assembly. Inc. you may use it in an assembly file along with other parts. All Rights Reserved 11 . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. When you extrude your 2D sketch. As you create your parametric model. These parameters are created automatically and are used by the application to resolve geometry as new features are added. the depth of the extrusion is also stored as a parameter and is then used to drive the geometry representing the extrusion. After you create the part. the parameters are stored in a table that you can access later and change if necessary.

After you create the parts and assembly. If changes occur in the part or assembly files. the parametric technology is extended to the drawing environment. Basic Parametric File Relationships 12 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . It is possible to retrieve the parametric dimensions used in creating the geometry as well as additional dimensions as required. Drawing views are created and maintain an associative link to the part and assembly. The image below represents the basic file references that exist in a typical parametric design. those changes will be reflected in the drawing.

Autodesk Inventor Workflow Autodesk Inventor has been designed to facilitate the typical workflow you will encounter in the design process. Inc. there is no set workflow for creating designs using Autodesk Inventor. • • • • • Be aware of your current Autodesk Inventor Project. draw the profile of the parts base feature. With the exception of a couple of fundamental rules. Typical Autodesk Inventor Design Workflow Overall Workflow of a Typical Autodesk Inventor Design Session. you will choose the appropriate path based upon your design intent. you learn more about each of the steps listed below. The overall workflow of any Autodesk Inventor design will involve the following steps. As the designer. the workflow for creating designs in Autodesk Inventor is flexible. Use both Sketched and Placed Features to create the 3D geometry you require for your design. Use one of the templates provided to create your new part. Because typical design workflow changes and evolves with the design. All Rights Reserved 13 . Procedure In this lesson you will learn the typical workflow of an Autodesk Inventor design session. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Place and constrain the parts in the 3D Assembly (required only when the component is part of a larger assembly of components). As you proceed through this course. within each step further variations will occur. On the initial sketch you create. and drawings. Projects are used to resolve file references for assemblies. presentations.

Use standard assembly constraints such as Mate. All new parts you create will have a blank sketch automatically placed. Create the profile of your geometry on the initial sketch. Place existing parts into the assembly or create new parts in the context of the assembly.• • If the design requires an exploded view. Angle. You create Additional Sketched and/or Placed features as required to generate the necessary 3D geometry. You then use sketched features such as Extrude and Revolve to create your Base Feature. Creating 2D Drawings. Repeat the steps above until all components are added to the assembly. create the Presentation representing the exploded assembly. Tangent and Insert to position and constrain the parts to other parts in the assembly. Part Design Workflow The following steps represent the overall workflow for creating parts using Autodesk Inventor software. • • • • Use one of the part templates provided to create a new part. • • • • Create a new assembly using one of the assembly templates provided. Assembly Creation Workflow The following steps represent the overall workflow for creating assemblies using Autodesk Inventor software. 14 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process .

ipt Principle Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 15 . Use the annotation tools to create the required annotation. The file extension is *. Repeat the steps above to create additional sheets and views as required.Drawing Creation Workflow The following steps represent the overall workflow for creating drawings using Autodesk Inventor software. Inc. Use standard view creation tools to create the required 2D drawing views. • • • • Use one of the drawing templates provided to create a new drawing. You use the part file to describe the individual parts which make up an assembly. Part Files Part files represent the foundation of all designs using Autodesk Inventor.

Assembly Files Principle Assembly files consist of multiple part files assembled in a single file to represent your assembly.iam Presentation Files You use presentation files to create exploded views of the assembly. You use assembly constraints to constrain all of the parts to each other. The assembly file contains references to all of its component files. It is also possible to animate the exploded views to simulate how the assembly should be put together or taken apart. File extension: *. File extension: *.ipn Principle 16 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process .

File extension: *. You can also use drawing files to create simple 2D drawings in much the same way you would use other 2D drawing programs.Drawing Files You use drawing files to create the necessary 2D documentation of your design. Inc. and views required for manufacturing. annotations.idw Principle Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. the views are associative to the 3D model and changes in model geometry are automatically reflected in the drawing. All Rights Reserved 17 . When you use a drawing file to create 2D views of an existing 3D model. Drawing files include dimensions.

18 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process .Using Templates Files Template files serve as the basis for all new files you create using Autodesk Inventor software. and default tolerances are automatically applied to your new file. (b) English. Template files are categorized into two main groups: (a) English for english units. By using the template files you create. while the English and Metric tabs present template files for their respective units. The Open dialog box offers three tabs: (a) Default.Templates To create a new Autodesk Inventor file. The next time you create a new Autodesk Inventor file. and (c) Metric. for metric units such as millimeter and meter. inch and feet and (b) Metric. Need Your Own Custom Template Tab? Tip Create a new folder containing at least one file in the templates folder of your Autodesk Inventor installation. snap spacing. a new tab will appear in the Open dialog box with the name of your new folder. properties such as units. click the tab representing the required unit type. Open Dialog Box . The Default tab presents templates based upon the default unit you select during installation. Principle Autodesk Inventor offers template files for each type of file. then select the appropriate template and click Open.

Projects in Autodesk Inventor Overview Overview Overview You use project files to resolve path locations of Autodesk Inventor software files. All Rights Reserved 19 . In this lesson you will learn the concept and implementation of Autodesk Inventor software Project files. Inc. the location of the part files must be resolved. Active Project Objectives After completing this lesson. When an assembly file is loaded. The same is true when loading a drawing or presentation files. you will be able to: • • • • • Understand the concept of Projects Understand the concept of Autodesk Inventor project files Setup Autodesk Inventor Projects Create Autodesk Inventor Projects Edit Autodesk Inventor Project files Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

This is the sole purpose of project files.Project Concepts When you use Autodesk Inventor software to create designs. or presentation file. The design and documentation of a single part file will require at least two separate files: (a) a part file and (b) a drawing file. The below image represents file dependencies that exist in a typical assembly design. By storing path information for each project. (b) part files. presentation. Project Concepts Using separate files for each file type is critical for performance and is common among most parametric modeling systems. The design and documentation of assembly models will require a minimum three different file types: (a) assembly files. drawing. each one will consist of multiple files and file types. 20 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . or drawing file. and (c) drawing files. Typical File Dependencies When you open an assembly. Autodesk Inventor software knows exactly where to look for the required files when opening an assembly. the active project file is used to resolve path locations to the referenced files.

The same is true for Autodesk Inventor Project files. A typical Autodesk Inventor design will make use of some or all of these categories depending on the structure of your assembly and the environment in which you are working. Local Search Paths: Avoid using a local search path except for design exploration. Inc. Only one designer should use a project with a defined workspace in a single session of Autodesk Inventor at a time. You will generally create one project file for each design you create. semi-isolated. Do not make a local search Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved • • 21 .Project Files When you create designs you probably organize them in different folder locations. the active project is identified by the check mark. For single-user and vault modes. the master project shared by the design team is included in individual projects so that all data in the workgroup folder are accessible and managed from a single project. In the below image. but only one project can be active at any time. Project File Categories • Included File: In a semi-isolated environment.Concept There is no limit to the number of project files you can create. Workspace: A personal location where you edit your personal copy of design files in single-user. Project Files . the workspace should be the only defined editable location. Example List of Available Projects Project File Categories Each Project file is divided into separate categories in which you will define different paths. and vault modes. Do not use it for design project data.

Assembly files exist in the Robot Assembly folder. Local Search Paths 4. Workgroup Search Paths A simple way to remember the search order is to remember Libraries first. The common factors in all Libraries is that the path is considered by Autodesk Inventor software to be read-only and parts stored within a library search path rarely. • • Component files exist in the Components folder.path a subfolder of the workspace folder. it will search for files using paths contained in each category using the following order. 22 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . Workspace 3. change. changing the library name later will break library references. Libraries 2. you will see the assembly file is stored in a different location from the component files. Project Category Search Order When examining this diagram. • • Project Categories . 1. if ever. When Autodesk Inventor software needs to locate referenced files. each needs a descriptive name that should not change. If library folders are defined.Search Order Knowing and remembering the category search order is critical to properly implementing and managing project files. or can also include common parts that you design. Part libraries can consist of standard off-the-shelf components that you use in your designs. The below image represents a typical Project file with path locations defined in each category. Options: You use these properties to set specific options for the Project file. then the order each category appears in the Project window. Local search paths are searched after the workspace is searched. Libraries: You use this category to define search paths for part libraries. Because the library name is stored in the reference. • Workgroup Search Paths: Workgroup folder locations are defined in the project workgroup search path and are the master project locations used by shared and semi-isolated modes for file check out and check in.

The Hex Cap Screw is stored in a folder defined as a Library category. Inc. All Rights Reserved 23 . it is used to resolve the component locations. File Resolution Example Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Because the Components folder is a sub-folder of the defined workspace.

setting up Projects for a single user environment will differ from multi-user environment. Procedure In this lesson you will learn how to setup Project files for both a single-user and multiuser environment. if there are files open in Autodesk Inventor software. Edit Project Pane: Select the category or right-click on the option you want to change. • • The Named Shortcut will appear in the Open dialog box. Note: You cannot edit the active Project or activate a different project. Open Dialog Box .Project Setup How you setup your Projects will depend largely on the type of environment in which you are working. Typical Single-User Project Select Project Pane: Select a Project to edit or double-click on a Project to activate it. The Category Search Path stores the path location. When you edit search paths they are divided into two sections: (a) Named Shortcut and (b) Category Search Path. For example. enabling you to easily navigate to the search path.Project Pane The Projects portion of the Open dialog box is divided in to two panes. 24 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process .

\ followed by the folder location relative to the physical location of the Project file.ipj file is stored in the folder C:\Designs\Robot Assembly. the Locations area of the dialog box displays all of the Named Shortcuts contained in the active Project. Using Relative Paths in Your Project Files It is possible to set your Project file to use relative paths instead of storing the complete path in each category. the path settings begin with . Relative Paths On/Off Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. the Robot-Assembly.Open Dialog Box . All Rights Reserved 25 . In the following example.Location Shortcuts When you Open files. When you enable the Use Relative Paths setting. Inc. Using relative paths enables greater portability of your Project Files and datasets.

Project File Location Projects Folder Option Because you can store your project files in a number of different locations. Project File Location We recommend that you store your project file in the upper level folder of your project design folders. If you would like to use a different path for your Project files. then click the Files tab. The default Projects Folder option is will be set to your My Documents folder. Typical File Structure .Projects Folder 26 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . As long as the folders maintain their relative location to the storage location of the Project file. Autodesk Inventor will be able to resolve the files as required. On the Tools menu.When you use relative paths in your Project file. Autodesk Inventor software uses Windows®shortcuts to point to the project files that have been accessed on your computer. it is possible to physically move the entire folder structure to another location or storage device. This will help to keep your project file organized with your designs and will simplify portability issues. enter or browse a new location. you need an efficient way of locating them. click Application Options. Options Dialog Box . Rather than search every folder on your computer or network.

Listing of Project File Shortcuts Setting Up Folder Structures A typical project might have parts and assemblies unique to the project. Avoid storing more than one hundred files in a single folder. or rename files. it is a good idea to set up subfolders under your project workspace or workgroup folder. the My Documents folder is selected to list all files. Always save new files in the workspace or workgroup defined for your project or one of its subfolders. • Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.In the below image. if you change the folder structure. fittings. Because references are stored as relative paths from project folders. Keep the subfolder structure relatively flat and do not store files that are unrelated to the project under the root folder. or electrical components. They are Windows®shortcuts to the actual project files. All Rights Reserved 27 . and off-the-shelf components such as fasteners. copy them to a library folder. If you plan to edit files from existing designs. making it a logical way to organize the files used in a design project. you are likely to break file references. set up a folder structure before you create a project and start saving files. You can keep all your design files for a project in the subfolders. To reduce the possibility of file resolution problems. or define a library in your project that locates the root folder of the project in which the parts were released. The Project file shortcuts in the right-hand pane of the Explorer window are not the actual project files. standard components unique to your company. copy them to the desired workspace or workgroup subfolder. move. If you intend to reference existing design files. To help organize your design files. Use these guidelines as you create a folder structure for files associated with a project: • • • Follow your company standards and naming conventions for the project folders. Inc.

) Not defined. The file check-out status is not available in the browser. The setting you choose will largely depend upon your working environment. One or more defined.\. Not defined. If one designer is doing most of the work. and locate the Workgroup at . All design files are in one folder (the workspace) and its subdirectories. • Off (Single User): You use this option for a single-user environment where Check-In and Check-Out capabilities are not required because the data is not shared with others in a workgroup. Typical Multi-User Off (single) project setup Included File Workspace search paths Local search paths Workgroup search paths Library Locations Not defined. shared is the least flexible because all design team members share a single workgroup location. you can locate the workgroup on his or her computer and make it available as a network share to other team members.\. each needs a descriptive name that should not change. Original files are stored in a personal workspace that is intended to be used by only a single user. Set the project to Use Relative Paths = True.Multi-User Project Settings There are four Multi-User settings that you can use to control the type of Project. A shared project defines a workgroup location and one or more library locations. Place the project Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process Options 28 . Because the library name is stored in the reference. (Same location as project file. except for files referenced from libraries. One defined at . Multi User = Off Use relative path = True Old versions to keep on save = 1 (the higher the number the more disk space required). • Shared: Shared user mode is only appropriate for small design groups with well-defined roles for editing design files. Of the multi-user modes. If library folders are defined. changing the library name later will break library references. You do not have to check out files.

Canceling a check out makes it available to other designers but does not restore it to its state before check out.ipj) in the workgroup folder. after you make design changes and decide to discard them. each needs a descriptive name that should not change. Semi-isolated mode is useful when you need to isolate a part or subassembly. Typical Shared mode project setup Included File Workspace search paths Local search paths Workgroup search paths Library Locations Not defined. copied. All Rights Reserved 29 . rather than copy them locally.(.) Not defined. Not defined. Because the library name is stored in the reference. A file status browser shows the check-out status of project files that are in the workgroup and workspace locations. Designers can see when someone has a file checked out and are prevented from replacing the work of one another. Design team members share the workgroup location. you have access to only the number of file versions you specify in the project. If library folders are defined. Unlike the vault. You can check files in and out from the file status browser. One defined at . Note that checking out a file does not protect it from being moved. Multi User = Shared Use relative path = True Old versions to keep on save = 1 (the higher the number the more disk space required). One or more defined. or work with copies of parts and assemblies to evaluate design variations. semi-isolated mode is the most powerful of the multi-user options. Design team members open.\. and save the original files directly in the workgroup folders where they are stored. where they make and save file changes. work on. (Same location as project file. • Semi-Isolated: If Autodesk Vault is not available. changing the library name later will break library references. If necessary. you can cancel the Options Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. or deleted using Microsoft®Windows Explorer. Inc. and cannot access vault advanced database query and configuration capabilities. Design team members always have access to the most up-to-date versions when they open files or refresh them.

check out to revert the file back to the original file. One advantage semi-isolated mode has over vault mode is that each designer needs only enough workspace storage for files he or she is actively editing, and there is no need to update the workspace to see changes other designers have checked in. Each designer always has access to the latest checked-in changes, plus any personal changes. All design team members share a master project, which is included in their personal project, and defines the workgroup and library locations of the design project data files. Checking out files automatically copies them from the workgroup to your personal workspace for editing. Checked-out files are saved to your personal workspace after editing. Files not checked out continue to be referenced from the central work group location and cannot be saved. Design team members do not see changes to files saved by others until the files are checked in to the workgroup location. A file status browser shows the check-out status of project files that are in the workgroup and workspace locations. You can check files in and out from the file status browser. Upon file check in, the file is automatically copied from your personal workspace to the workgroup removed from your personal workspace, and the previous version moved to the OldVersions folder. The workgroup uses this new version when the file is opened or checked out in the future. Canceling a check out removes the file reservation, deletes the workspace version, and leaves the original file in the workgroup. No changes are saved to the file. When you save a file, the previous version is moved to the OldVersions folder. Any designer that already had the file open will continue to access that version until they refresh or close and reopen the file.

Master Project (shared by entire group) setup
Included File Workspace search path Local search paths Workgroup search paths Not defined. Not defined. Not defined. One defined at .\.

30

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process

Master Project (shared by entire group) setup
Library Locations When library locations are defined, each must have a descriptive name that does not change and a UNC-based location. The library name is stored as part of the references to files it contains. Library locations can be defined to be in a subfolder of the workgroup, particularly for cases such as the content library. For example, the name would be Content Library and the location would be ./Content Library. Options Multi User = Semi-Isolated Use relative path = True Old versions to keep on save = 1 (the higher the number the more disk space required).

Personal Project (one for each user) setup
Included File Location of the workgroup project using a UNC path. You can browse to the included file from the project editor or enter the path. Location of your personal workspace. Locate the personal project at .\(your personal workspace folder). Not defined. Not defined. It is inherited from the group project file. Not defined. It is inherited from the group project file. Use relative path = True Other options are inherited from the master project. • Vault: (You must install Autodesk®Vault to use this mode.)

Workspace search paths

Local search paths Workgroup search paths Library Locations Options

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

31

Creating Projects
You begin to create project files via a wizard type interface. You are prompted to fill in the relevant information such as Type of Project, Project Name, Workspace Folder, and Libraries to import from other Projects. After the initial creation is complete, you proceed to adding the required paths to the categories you will use.
Procedure

In this lesson you will learn how to create a project file.

Access Methods
You can use either the Autodesk Inventor internal project editor or the standalone project editor to create new projects. Menu Standalone Project Editor File > Projects Start > Programs > Inventor 8 > Tools > Project Editor

Process Overview - Creating Single User Projects
The following steps represent an overview for creating a Single User Project. 1. 2. In the Open dialog box, in the Project Pane, click New. In the Autodesk Inventor project wizard dialog box, click New Single User Project and click Next.

32

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process

3.

In the Name field, enter Flange-Assembly and in the Project (Workspace) Folder field, enter C:\Designs\FlangeAssembly. Click Next.

4.

If you have any projects with Libraries defined, they will appear in this list. This enables you to copy Library Paths from other project files. Click Finish to create the project. If you are prompted to create the path, click OK.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

33

Process Overview - Creating Semi-Isolated Projects
The following steps represent an overview for creating a Semi-Isolated Project. Your begin by creating a Master Project. 1. 2. In the Open dialog box, in the Project Pane, click New. In the Autodesk Inventor project wizard dialog box, click New Semi-Isolated Master Project and click next.

3.

In the Name field, enter a name for the Master Project. In the Project (Workgroup) Folder, enter a path to the Workgroup folder and click Next.

34

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process

4.

If you have any projects with Libraries defined, they will appear in this list. This enables you to copy Library Paths from other project files. Click Finish to create the project. If you are prompted to create the path, click OK.

After you create your Master Project you create a Personal Project. 1. In the Open dialog box, in the Project Pane, select the Master Project to use for your Personal Project, then click New.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

35

2.

In the Autodesk Inventor project wizard dialog box, click New Semi-Isolated Workspace and click Next.

3.

In the Name field, enter a name for your Workspace Project and enter a path for your workspace. Verify the Master Project File is listed correctly and click Finish. If you are prompted to create the path, click OK.

36

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process

Editing Projects
You can use the internal Project Editor or the Standalone Project Editor located on the Windows®Start menu to edit projects. In the Select Project Pane, select the Project to edit. In the Edit Project Pane select the category or option you need to edit. Depending on the item you edit, different options will be available on both the shortcut menu and to the right of the Edit Project Pane.
Procedure

Command Access
There are two methods available for editing projects. Menu Standalone Project Editor File > Projects Start > Programs > Inventor 8 > Tools > Project Editor

Project Pane - Open Dialog Box

When editing projects, right-clicking on the various categories or options will display the following shortcut menus.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

37

Included File Options

Open: This option opens the project file used in the included file link. Edit: This option edits the link to the included project file. Delete: This option deletes the link to the included project file.

Workspace and Library Category Options

Add Path: This option adds a path to the workspace category. Enter a named shortcut and search path in the fields below the category. Add Paths from File...: This option adds the workspace path contained in another project file. A dialog box will appear for you to select the project file. Paste Path: This option pastes a path that was copied to the clipboard. Delete Section Paths: This option deletes all paths from the category.

Local and Workgroup Category Search Path Options

Add Path: This option adds a path to the workspace category. Add Paths from File...: This option adds the workspace path contained in another project file. A dialog box will appear for you to select the project file. Add Paths from Directory...: Select this option to add the path of a selected directory including all sub-directories. Paste Path: Select this option to paste a path that was copied to the clipboard. Delete Section Paths: Select this option to delete all paths from the category.

38

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process

Multi-User Options

Off: Use this option for a single-user environment where Check-In and Check-Out capabilities are not required because the data is not shared with others in a workgroup. Shared: Use this option in a workgroup environment where multiple users may access the same data files. This option enables you to take advantage of the Check-Out/CheckIn features. When you edit any file, you will be prompted to check the file out at which time, the file will remain in its current folder but will be locked from editing by other users. Semi-Isolated: Use this option in a workgroup environment where multiple users may be accessing the same data files. When you edit a file, you will be prompted to check the file out at which time the file will be copied to the workspace defined in your project. The original file remains in its original location, but it is locked from editing until you check-in the version contained in your workspace folder. Vault: Only available if Autodesk Vault is installed.

Edit and Position Buttons
Edit and Position Buttons appear on the right-side of the Projects dialog box. Move Up: Select this option to move the selected path up in the search order within its category. Move Down: Select this option to move the selected path down in the search order within its category. Add Path: Select this option to add a path to the selected category. Edit Path: Select this option to edit the selected path.

Editing the Active Project
You must close all files in Autodesk Inventor before attempting to edit the active project.
Note

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

39

Completed Active Project File 40 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . click Exercise: Projects in Autodesk Inventor 2. click Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process From the table of contents for Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process. you will create the Project file to be used for the remainder of this course. From the Main table of contents page. You are creating a Single User Project file with a Workspace and Library. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. The completed exercise is shown in the following image.Exercise: Projects in Autodesk Inventor In this exercise.

All Rights Reserved 41 . Part. Inc. Autodesk Inventor Interface Objectives After completing this lesson. and Drawing environments Identify the Panel Bar Identify the Standard toolbar and groups of standard tools Understand how the menu structure is context sensitive based upon the environment you are using Identify and use Keyboard Shortcuts Identify the 3D Indicator and what it represents Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.The User Interface Overview Overview Overview In this lesson you will learn about the Autodesk Inventor 8 software interface. Presentation. you will be able to: • • • • • • Identify the Browser in the Assembly.

Browser . Nested under each part you will see the assembly constraints. it displays the origin folder containing the default X. It will also list all parts you use in the assembly. when you work on an assembly you use the browser to present information specific to the assembly environment. If you select an assembly constraint. Part Modeling Environment When you use the browser in the Part Modeling Environment. and Center Point. the browser displays information that is relevant to part modeling.Part Modeling Assembly Modeling Environment . Y. an edit box will appear at the bottom of the browser enabling you to edit the offset or angle value for the constraint. and Z Planes. For example. It is context sensitive with the environment you use. and Z Planes. Axes. Features are listed in the order in which they are created. it will display the origin folder containing the default X. and Center Point.Position View When you use the browser in the Assembly Modeling Environment. Y. It will also list all features you use to create the part.The Browser The Browser is one of your main interface components. While you use the Part Modeling environment. 42 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . you will use the various browser modes. Axes. Procedure As you progress through this course.

All Rights Reserved 43 .Presentation View Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. it will display the Presentation views you create followed by the tweaks you use for the explosion. It is also possible button to switch the browser mode from Tweak View to Sequence View to select the or Assembly View. Inc.Note: If you select the Position View drop-down button you can select Modeling View to switch the browser to display the part features nested under the parts instead of the assembly constraints. Browser . This is useful when performing part modeling functions in the context of the assembly.Assembly Modeling Presentation Environment When you use the browser in the Presentation environment. When you expand each weak you will see the part(s) included in each one. Browser .

Browser . title blocks and sketched symbols.Drawing Modeling 44 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . the browser displays the Drawing Resource folder containing sheet formats. It will also display each sheet in the drawing along with the views you create for each.Drawing Environment In the Drawing Environment. borders.

Right-click anywhere on the Panel Bar and select Expert.The Panel Bar The panel bar is your primary interface to the tools available while you design.Expert Mode Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. The tool icons. The Panel Bar switches to Expert mode. names. For example. Inc. the panel bar will automatically switch to display the correct tools for the context where you work. Note: You can also access the Expert mode. when you switch from assembly modeling to part modeling. This mode allows more area for the browser window. All Rights Reserved 45 . Assembly Panel Bar . Assembly Panel .Learning Mode Select the Assembly Panel drop-down menu and click Expert. The context sensitive design presents the relevant tools based upon the current context of your design session. Procedure The Assembly Panel Bar is displayed below in the default Learning mode. and keyboard shortcuts are displayed. Tools are displayed with icons only.

You use the Part Modeling Panel Bar to create sketched and placed features in the modeling environment. Part Modeling Panel Bar You use the Sketch Panel Bar in the modeling environment and for assembly based sketching to create 2D parametric sketches. Sketch Panel Bar 46 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . and constraints. dimensions.

All Rights Reserved 47 . Drawing Views Panel Bar Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. tweaks. Inc.You use the Presentation Panel Bar to create presentation views. and animate geometry in the presentation environment. Presentation Panel Bar You use the Drawing Views Panel Bar in the drawing environment to create drawing views on the sheet.

Drawing Annotation Panel Bar 48 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process .You use the Drawing Annotation Panel Bar in the drawing environment to add reference dimensions and other annotation objects.

and others. Standard Toolbar The Standard toolbar is displayed here in three separate images.Appearance Tools Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. Procedure Customizing toolbars is beyond the scope of this course.Toolbars There are several toolbars available for you to use. Zoom Window. Please refer to the Autodesk Inventor help system for more information. Standard Toolbar . Rotate. It is organized into groups based upon functionality. but by default only the Standard toolbar is displayed. All Rights Reserved 49 .Viewing Tools This area of the toolbar displays appearance related tools for controlling your model's appearance. Standard Toolbar . Standard Toolbar .File and Modeling Tools This area of the toolbar displays standard viewing tools such as Zoom All. This area of the toolbar displays tools for standard file and modeling operations.

Part Modeling Environment Insert Menu . Insert Menu . you should take the time to familiarize yourself with the different options that appear on the menu while working in different environments. Procedure As you are learning Autodesk Inventor.Drawing Environment 50 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process .Menu Structure Autodesk Inventor software utilizes the standard pull-down menu structure common in all Windows application.Assembly Modeling Environment Insert Menu . The menu structure is context sensitive based upon the environment and mode you are using.

Keyboard Shortcuts On the panel bar and menus. Z axis of the coordinate system. P for Place Component. The indicator displays your current view orientation in relation to the X. For example. you will use keyboard shortcuts to access tools. and Presentation environments. the keyboard shortcuts will be listed for the tools as they are explained. the 3D Indicator is displayed in the lower left area of the graphics window. Procedure 3D Indicator Red: X-Axis Green: Y-Axis Blue: Z-Axis Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. All Rights Reserved 51 . N for Create Component. Shortcut Keys Displayed on Panel Bar 3D Indicator While using the Assembly. Entering the keyboard shortcut is the same as clicking the tool on the panel bar or menu. Procedure Where applicable. Part Modeling. Y.

click Exercise: The User Interface 2. and sketching environments. You will experiment with different interface objects in the assembly. 52 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . part modeling. click Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process From the table of contents for Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process.Exercise: The User Interface Open an assembly and explore the Autodesk Interface. From the Main table of contents page. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.

Online Help and Tutorials Overview Overview Overview Autodesk Inventor software offers several types of online help and tutorial references. and Tutorials are all available. Inc. Visual Syllabus Objectives After completing this lesson. you will be able to: • • • • • • • Understand Help Topics Use the How To Popups Access the Help Topic containing information on the new features in this Autodesk Inventor release Access tutorials Access the Visual Syllabus Access the Help for AutoCAD Users Access Autodesk Online Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Standard Help files. All Rights Reserved 53 . context sensitive How-To presentations. In this lesson you will learn about the different resources available for learning Autodesk Inventor.

Main Page As you navigate to specific topics in the help system. You can also enter search words in the left pane of the Help Topics window.Command Launch 54 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . icons may appear in the help topics representing specific tools. You can access the Help Topics window by using the F1 key or any of the other methods listed below.Help Topics A comprehensive Help Topics section installs by default. Help Topics . Click the icon to start the tool. Help Topics . Menu Toolbar Help > Help Topics Keyboard Shortcut F1 Use standard point and click navigation techniques to navigate the help system. Procedure Access Methods You can use either of the following methods to launch the help topic. The Help Topics window is only one component of the Help System.

click How To. Right-click in the graphics window. Procedure Access Methods You can use the following method to launch the How To Popups. Animated Tangent Line Show Me Presentation Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. and on the shortcut menu. All Rights Reserved 55 . A help topic. Show Me Help Window The below image represents the type of information that is available in the context sensitive How To Popups. Inc. The animated sequence will play automatically and you can select the navigation buttons to navigate to specific sequence numbers. click How To. It presents information to you in a manner relevant to each task.How To Popups The Help System is context sensitive. will be displayed containing information on the selected tool in an animated sequence. or in some cases the Show Me help window. Shortcut Menu Right-click in the graphics window and on the shortcut menu.

Procedure Access Methods You can use the following method to launch the What's New help topic. All changes are organized into main categories such as Drawings. Menu Help > What's New What's New .What's New The What's New help topic contains information on all new features in the current release of Autodesk Inventor. and Sheet metal. Expand the category of interest and use standard point and click navigation to learn about the new features.Specific Topic 56 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . Part Modeling.Help Window What's New .

Inc. All Rights Reserved 57 . Menu Help > Tutorials Inventor Tutorials . From the main tutorial window.Tutorials There are several tutorials available covering a wide range of topics from Introduction to Advanced. The tutorials present step by step information on performing certain tasks in Autodesk Inventor. use standard point and click navigation techniques to select the topic of interest. Procedure Access Methods You can use the following method to access the tutorials.Main Window and Working with Projects Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

then select specific feature tools available.Visual Syllabus The Visual Syllabus presents topic specific information in an animated presentation. Standard Toolbar Visual Syllabus . Start the Visual Syllabus. Procedure Access Methods You can use the following method to access the Visual Syllabus. Information on the features you select will be presented to you in an animation. select the main topic.Main Window and Animated Presentation 58 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process .

Inventor Command Map Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Use standard point and click navigation options to navigate to the topic of choice. All Rights Reserved 59 . Menu Help > Help for AutoCAD Users The below image represents the main window of the Help for AutoCAD Users help topic. Procedure Access Methods You can use the following method to access the Help for AutoCAD Users. Inc. Help for AutoCAD Users .Main Window AutoCAD .Help For AutoCAD Users AutoCAD users can use the Help Topic designed specifically for them as they make the transition to Autodesk Inventor software.

you will be arrive at a special area of the Autodesk. The information is presented via HTML. Procedure The Autodesk Online portal contains dynamic and new information. It is updated regularly. PDF.Skill Builders Link Autodesk Online 60 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process .com website dedicated to providing e-learning materials and tutorials for the Autodesk Inventor user. Menu Help > Autodesk Online Autodesk Online .Autodesk Online Autodesk Online is an e-learning portal to training information available for Autodesk software users. Access Methods You can use the following method to access the Autodesk Online. and other web-friendly formats. Select the Autodesk Inventor Skill Builders link.

The completed exercise is shown in the following image. From the Main table of contents page. All Rights Reserved 61 . Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. click Exercise: Online Help and Tutorials 2.Exercise: Online Help and Tutorials In this exercise you will use the online help and tutorials to create a new part with a simple sketch and features. Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. click Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process From the table of contents for Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process.

then create a Personal Workspace Project and use the Included file option to include the Master Project. click Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process From the table of contents for Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process. you will create two new Autodesk Inventor Project files. (a) Create a new Semi-Isolated Project to be used as a Master Project. From the Main table of contents page.Challenge Exercise: Introducing the Modeling Process Challenge Exercise: Introducing the Modeling Process Print Exercise Reference In this exercise. Completed Project File 62 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process . To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. click Challenge Exercise: Introducing the Modeling Process 2. Utilize the information contained in this chapter as well as the information contained in the Help System to create the required projects. The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

through the use of keyboard shortcuts. The file types created by Autodesk Inventor and how to use them in your designs. Accessing different tools. The user interface for Autodesk Inventor software. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 63 . Accessing several different resources for learning Autodesk Inventor software. Creating and editing project files. Inc.Chapter Summary Summary You learned the following in this chapter: Summary • • • • • • • • Starting a design session using Autodesk Inventor software. The typical workflow of creating a design in Autodesk Inventor as well as different assembly modeling concepts. and which types of projects are used for particular situations. The concept of project files and how they are used to maintain file references between Autodesk Inventor files.

64 Chapter 1: Introduction to the Modeling Process .

Using the Precise Input toolbar. Edit sketches. Options for displaying dimensions. Using the sketch coordinate system. The sketch environment and available sketch tools. Use the Sketch Doctor to assist in fixing problems with sketches. Apply dimensions using both manual and automatic methods.. Applying dimensions manually and automatically. • • • • • • • • • In this chapter After completing this chapter. Apply dimensions to sketch geometry. Editing sketches and using the Sketch Doctor to fix problems with sketches. Constraining sketches using both automatic and manual 2D constraints. Placing parametric dimensions to control the size of sketch elements. Plan and implement constraints on 2D sketches.. Dimensioning 2D sketches. Geometric constraints and how they can be used. View and delete constraints that have been applied to geometry. Planning and viewing constraints that have been applied to geometry. you will be able to.. Guidelines for dimensioning sketches. Use construction geometry to assist in creating 2D sketch geometry. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Different aspects of creating sketches in Autodesk Inventor software. Apply constraints manually and automatically. Rules for creating efficient sketches.. .Introduction to Sketching Chapter Introduction In this chapter you learn about. Using construction geometry to assist you in creating 2D sketches. • Create 2D sketches for use in 3D designs. Create sketches using the Precise Input toolbar.

Sketching using the Precise Input toolbar Objectives After completing this lesson.Creating Sketches Overview Overview Overview The fundamental basis for all three-dimensional (3D) designs begins with a sketch. you will be able to • • • • • • • Understand the sketch environment Create sketch geometry Understand the rules for creating sketches Understand the Sketch Coordinate System Utilize the Precise Input interface to create sketch geometry Edit sketches Use the Sketch Doctor to fix sketch geometry 66 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . The two-dimensional (2D) geometry contained in the sketch is used to create base features as well as secondary features.

Each sketch contains different geometry. Autodesk Inventor sketch environment Following are some important features in the sketch environment: Sketch panel bar: Displays the 2D sketching tools available. This is automatically created when you create a new part. Because sketches represent the most fundamental part of your design. Sketch origin indicator: Used to identify the current location and orientation of the sketch origin and axes. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. the environment in which the geometry is created is always consistent. you work in an environment designed specifically for the creation of 2D geometry. All Rights Reserved 67 . it is critical that you become comfortable with the environment in which they are created.Sketch Environment When you create sketches. represents the X and Y axes of the sketch. Inc. Concept A typical part generally includes multiple sketches positioned along various planes. Sketch axes: Aligned with the sketch origin indicator. Although the geometry varies from part to part. Sketch1: The first sketch in the part.

Creating Additional Sketches The first sketch in a new part is automatically created. or work plane. Access Methods Toolbar Select the Sketch tool > Select a face or plane to orient the sketch. you must create them manually. If you require additional sketches. A new sketch can be created on a part face. Shortcut Menu Right-click the face of a part or a work plane. Creating additional sketches 68 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . and on the shortcut menu click New Sketch. origin plane.

All Rights Reserved 69 .Sketch Tools In the sketch environment. Editing tools are covered in a later chapter. Rectangle. Circle. Panel Bar Shortcut Key L Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. The 2D Sketch Panel contains all of the tools to assist in creating sketch geometry. Sketch Panel Bar Line Tool The Line tool enables you to create line segments on the sketch. and Chamfer. Procedure In this lesson you learn about the most common sketch tools: Line. the Panel Bar automatically switches to display the available sketch tools. Fillet. Arc. refer to the Help Topics for more information about sketch tools. If necessary.

This glyph indicates the type of constraint that is being applied automatically to the line segments. 2. the first image shows that the third line segment is being constrained parallel to the first segment. Pick a point to end the line segment. 4. Drag your cursor in the direction you want to draw the line. If the Constraint Glyph represents a constraint that you would like to change. again paying attention to the Constraint Glyph indicating the automatic constraint. 1. 70 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . 3. Pick a point to end the line segment.Process Overview . and the third image shows that the constraint is now inferred to the sketch element being scrubbed. the second image demonstrates by scrubbing a different sketch element. On the Panel Bar. Continue drawing line segments as required. Note the appearance of the Constraint Glyph. Drag the cursor in the direction of the next line segment. click the Line tool and pick a starting point for the line segment. scrub geometry on the sketch for the constraint to be applied and continue drawing the line segment.Creating Lines The following steps represent an overview for creating lines in your sketch. In the image sequence below.

Panel Bar Shortcut Key SHIFT+C Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 71 . 6.5. and click Done on the shortcut menu. Inc. Right-click in the graphics window. Circle Tool The Circle tool enables you to create circles on the sketch. Continue drawing line segments as required.

on the Panel Bar click the Center Point Circle tool and select the center point of the circle.Process Overview . To create a 3-Point Tangent Circle. Drag your cursor to a location representing the outside perimeter of the circle and pick that point to create the circle. Right-click in the graphics window. 3. To create a center point circle. 6. 4. and click Done on the shortcut menu. and click Done on the shortcut menu. Select three parts of the geometry that the circle will be tangent to. on the Panel Bar. 5. click the Tangent Circle tool. 1. Right-click in the graphics window.Creating Circles The following steps represent an overview for creating circles in your sketch. 72 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . 2.

All Rights Reserved 73 . Note: Arcs are created in a counterclockwise direction so pick your start point accordingly.Arc Tool The Arc tool enables you to create arcs on the sketch. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. • Pick a point representing the start point of the arc. Inc. Panel Bar Process Overview . click the Center Point Arc tool then pick a point representing the center of the arc. Creating Center Point Arcs: • On the Panel Bar.Creating Arcs The following steps represent an overview for creating arcs in your sketch.

180-. and click Done on the shortcut menu. 74 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . • Drag your cursor and pick the endpoint of the arc. or 270-degree arc. • Right-click in the graphics window. Note the Center Point Projection as you approach a 90-. • Right-click in the graphics window. click the Tangent Arc tool and pick the geometry being used for the arcs tangency. Creating Tangent Arcs: • On the Panel Bar. and on the shortcut menu click Done.• Pick a point representing the endpoint of the arc.

Creating 3-Point Arcs: • On the Panel Bar. • Pick a point for the endpoint of the arc. All Rights Reserved 75 . Inc. click the Three Point Arc tool and pick the start point of the arc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Depending upon existing geometry and arc size. constraint glyphs may appear. and on the shortcut menu click Done. • Drag your cursor to size the arc appropriately. • Right-click in the graphics window.

Creating a Two-Point Rectangle: 1. Right-click in the graphics window. 5. 76 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . click the Two Point Rectangle tool. 2. click the Three Point Rectangle tool. then pick a point representing the opposite corner of the rectangle. Pick a point representing the first corner of the rectangle. Pick a point representing the first corner of the rectangle. and click Done on the shortcut menu Creating a Three-Point Rectangle: To create rectangles at angles other than 0 and 90 degrees.Creating Rectangles The following steps represent an overview for creating rectangles in your sketch. 3.Rectangle Tool The Rectangle tool enables you to create rectangles on the sketch. 4. On the Panel Bar. Panel Bar Process Overview . On the Panel Bar.

Right-click in the graphics window. Fillet Tool The Fillet tool enables you to create fillets on the sketch. Then drag the cursor to size the rectangle. Applies an equal constraint to all fillets you create during the current session of the Fillet tool. On the Panel Bar. 8. Inc. 1. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Creating Fillets The following steps represent an overview for creating fillets in your sketch. and on the shortcut menu click Done. If you are creating multiple fillets of equal sizes. Process Overview .6. 7. Panel Bar 2D Fillet Dialog Box Radius: Enter a radius for the fillet feature. Pick a point representing the second point of the rectangle. click the Fillet tool and enter a radius for the fillet. All Rights Reserved 77 . click the Equal option.

78 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . and click Done on the shortcut menu. Continue selecting geometry or corners to be filleted. Panel Bar 2D Chamfer Dialog Box This option will cause dimensions to be placed representing the chamfer. right-click in the graphics window. a dimension appears on only the first fillet you create. Notice with the Equal option set. 4. 3.2. Chamfer Tool The Chamfer tool enables you to create chamfers on the sketch. Pick the corner of the geometry being filleted or select each line separately. When you are finished adding fillets.

2. Distance: Enter a value for one side of the chamfer. click the Chamfer tool. Distance: Enter a distance for the chamfer to be applied equally to both sides.This option will constrain secondary chamfers by referencing dimension parameters from the first chamfer created during this session of the Chamfer tool. adjust the options as required and select a point to chamfer or select the two entities separately.Creating Chamfers The following steps represent an overview for creating chamfers in your sketch. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. 1. All Rights Reserved 79 . Distance1: Enter a value for one side of the chamfer. Angle: Enter a value for the angle of the chamfer. Distance2: Enter a value for the second side of the chamfer. In the 2D Chamfer dialog box. Process Overview . On the Panel Bar.

click the Line tool and draw a standard line segment where the centerline will be. If necessary. Creating Centerlines You cannot draw centerlines. On the Panel Bar. Instead. 1. Using centerlines in your sketch will assist in creating revolve features and placing diametric profile dimensions. change the options in the dialog box and continue selecting points or geometry to create additional chamfers. click Done. Process Overview . you can draw regular line segments using the standard Line tool.3. When you are finished adding chamfers. 80 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . You then change the line segment to represent a centerline style.Creating Centerlines The following steps represent an overview for creating centerlines in your sketch. 4. in the 2D Chamfer dialog box.

2. The centerline can now be used to place diametric profile dimensions. Inc. All Rights Reserved 81 . select Centerline. The selected line will be converted to a centerline style. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Select the line segment and on the Standard toolbar. from the Styles drop-down list.

There will be times when you need to create sketch geometry that is not closed. Principle Following are some rules for successful sketching: • Keep the sketch simple. This lesson focuses on creating closed profiles.Rules for Creating Sketches Creating sketch geometry is as easy as drawing a closed shape using Autodesk Inventor Sketch tools. There are several ways to create closed shapes. circle. Do not fillet the corners of a sketch if you can apply a fillet to the edges of the finished 3D feature and achieve the same effect. or polygon or you can constrain sketch geometry so that separate sketch elements come together to create a closed shape. Complex sketch geometry can be difficult to manage as designs evolve. for example a path for a sweep feature or to create a surface. • • • • • Creating Sketches . You can use tools such as the rectangle. Accept default dimensions until the shape is stabilized. Use 2D constraints to stabilize sketch shape before size. Repeat simple shapes to build more complex shapes.Example 82 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . Use closed loops for profiles. Draw the profile sketch roughly to size and shape.

click Edit Coordinate System. showing its current origin and orientation. you can right-click the sketch in the browser and on the shortcut menu. you will not need to edit the sketch coordinates but if required. exit the sketch and in the Browser. All Rights Reserved 83 . Inc. In the event you need to edit the sketch coordinate system. right-click the sketch and click Edit Coordinate System on the shortcut menu. Principle In most cases. Independent Sketch Coordinates Editing the Sketch Coordinate System The following steps represent an overview for editing the Sketch Coordinate System. 1. The sketch coordinate icon appears. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. You must exit the sketch before you edit the coordinate system so you can change the orientation of the axes and reposition the origin. This coordinate system is based upon the location and method you use when you create the sketch and is completely independent from the 3D part model's coordinate system.Sketch Coordinate System Each sketch you create has its own independent coordinate system.

and then select a new point for the origin. 84 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . To change the sketch coordinate's origin.2. select the origin of sketch coordinate icon. The change the direction of the X or Y axis. 3. click the axis then select a new edge to align the axis to.

This enables you to create sketch geometry at specific lengths or angles prior to placing parametric dimensions. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. XY: This format specifies a coordinate relative to the origin. In the Y and ° boxes. The first point is relative to the origin. Inc. Y°: This format specifies a coordinate by y coordinate and angle from the positive X axis. Relative Orientation is not available while sketching. All Rights Reserved 85 . Subsequent points are relative to the last point picked or entered. It is also possible to use this tool to create sketch geometry based on relative coordinates from other model geometry. enter the desired values. Input Type: From the drop-down list. enter the desired values. select a data format. Relative Orientation: This option is used when moving faces on a base solid.Precise Input When creating sketch geometry it is possible to use the Precise Input toolbar to enter precise values or coordinates. In the X and ° boxes. In the X and Y boxes. Procedure Access Methods Use the following method to access the Precise Input tool: Toolbar View menu > Toolbars > Inventor Precise Input Precise Input Toolbar Relative Origin: This option enables you to enter coordinates relative to a point you select. It will rotate the axes of the active coordinate system. Delta Input: This option sets the inputs as a delta to the last point picked or entered. enter the desired values. X°: This format specifies a coordinate by x coordinate and angle from the positive X axis.

3. 1. Create a new sketch. click a sketch tool such as Line. 2. On the 2D Sketch Panel Bar. To set your relative Precise Relative point. 4. (Optionally enter offset values for the selected point. In the D and ° boxes.) 86 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching .d°: This format specifies a coordinate by a distance and angle from the positive X axis. On the View menu. Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for using the Precise Input tool. click the icon and pick a point on the sketch geometry. click Toolbars > Inventor Precise Input to display the Inventor Precise Input toolbar. enter the desired values.

Inc. 6. Click to accept the position. The point is previewed. Click to accept the point. 5. Click the Delta X Delta Y button to move the origin indicator to the last point. From the Input Type drop-down list. select the desired Input Type and enter the appropriate values in the corresponding boxes. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.The point is previewed. Continue to enter additional input values as required. All Rights Reserved 87 .

Click to accept the point. 8. Right-click in the graphics window and click done on the shortcut menu. 88 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . Click to accept the point. Continue to enter additional input values as required.The point is previewed. The point is previewed. 7.

you will be creating multiple sketches. the changes are applied to the features based upon those sketches. When the sketch is used by a feature such as Extrude. or Hole. Revolve. Access Methods The following methods can be used to edit sketches.Editing Sketches As you build your parametric model. Right-click the sketch and click Edit Sketch. Browser Browser Browser Double-click the sketch. Note the change in appearance in the browser as the background color changes indicating the active feature. Right-click the feature and click Edit Sketch. you are returned to the sketch environment and the Panel Bar changes. When you edit sketches. You can expand the Extrusion1 feature to expose the consumed sketch. In the image below. The ability to edit these features is fundamental to any parametric modeling session. Procedure In this lesson you learn how to edit sketches. All Rights Reserved 89 . Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Editing the sketch places the model in a rolled back state. Sketch1 has been consumed by Extrusion1. the sketch becomes consumed by the feature and appears under the feature in the Browser. where only the features existing at the time this sketch was created are visible. As you edit the sketches. You can see each of the sketches in the Browser by expanding the particular feature(s). providing you with access to all the sketch tools initially used in creating the sketch.

Editing Sketches On the Standard toolbar. 90 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . click the Return tool to exit the sketch environment.

you can make changes to geometry. All Rights Reserved 91 . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Once the sketch has been activated for editing. and constraints. right-click the feature or sketch and click Edit Sketch on the shortcut menu.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for editing sketches. 1. dimensions. Inc. In the Browser.

on the Standard toolbar. 92 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . click the Return tool to exit the sketch and return to the part model.2. The changes in the sketch are applied to the 3D features of the part. 3. When you are done editing the sketch. Continue to make edits to the sketch as required.

All Rights Reserved 93 . Inc. Access Methods The following methods can be used to access the Sketch Doctor.Sketch Doctor The Sketch Doctor is a tool that assists you in fixing common problems that can occur in your sketches. missing coincident constraints. Browser In the Extrude dialog box.Sketch Problems Detected Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Procedure In this lesson you learn how to use the Sketch Doctor to fix common problems in sketches. Extrude Dialog Box . which will diagnose and assist you in fixing the problems detected. While a sketch is activated. right-click and click Sketch Doctor. You click this button to start the Sketch Doctor. The Sketch Doctor can correct some problems. Common problems include redundant points. and open loops. while other problems may require manual editing and correction. Sketched Feature Dialog Box This icon is available in the Sketched Feature dialog box if a problem with the sketch is detected. the presence of the Red Cross icon indicates that problems have been detected with the sketch.

You select the problem to recover and click Next. Diagnose Sketch Dialog Box Detected problems are listed in the Sketch Doctor dialog box. all tests are selected. click Diagnose Sketch to start the diagnosis. Sketch Doctor Dialog Box 94 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching .In the Sketch Doctor dialog box. you select the diagnostic tests to perform. By default. Sketch Doctor Dialog Box In the Diagnose Sketch dialog box.

All Rights Reserved 95 . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.A problem diagnosis/description is displayed. Information about potential fixes is included. Sketch Doctor Dialog Box You select the appropriate treatment option and click Finish. and import only the geometry required for the sketch. Inc. Sketch Doctor Dialog Box Sketch Problems Tip Most sketch problems occur when you import 2D geometry from other applications. Read the import options closely while importing geometry.

2. click Exercise: Creating Sketches The completed exercise is shown in the following image. 3D Part Created Using Sketches 96 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . click Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching From the table of contents for Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.Exercise: Creating Sketches In this exercise. From the Main table of contents page. you create some basic sketch geometry use the sketch to create 3D features.

In this lesson you learn how to work with constraint sketches.Constraining Sketches Overview Overview Overview You use geometric constraints to control the sketch geometry to which they have been applied. forces that line segment to always be vertical. Inc. 2D Constraints on Part Sketch Objectives After completing this lesson. you will be able to: • • • • • • Understand the concept of constraining sketches Understand geometric constraints Understand how to plan constraints Show and delete constraints applied to 2D sketch geometry Use the Show All tool to show all constraints applied to a sketch Create and use construction geometry in the sketch Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. applied to a line segment. A tangent constraint added to an arc forces that arc to remain tangent to the geometry that it has been constrained. All Rights Reserved 97 . a vertical constraint. For example.

For example.Constraining Sketches in Autodesk Inventor When you add constraints to 2D geometry. or dimensions. Constraints stabilize sketch geometry by placing limits on how the geometry can change as the result of constraint dragging. horizontal. In most cases the inferred constraints are sufficient for your initial constraints. The sketch on the right is the result of adding additional constraints such as vertical. some constraints are inferred (applied automatically). Principle As you create sketches. Sketch Before and After Constraining 98 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . As you continue to develop the sketch. The sketch on the left was purposely drawn utilizing only some of the inferred constraints. if a horizontal constraint is applied to a line. that line is forced to be horizontal at all times. The following image illustrates the effect of constraints on sketch geometry. you may need to add additional constraints to properly stabilize the sketch geometry. you are adding a level of intelligence to the 2D geometry. and colinear.

Available Geometric Constraints Constraint Potential Sketch Elements Line Constraint Condition Created Constrained geometry is perpendicular to each other Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. 2D Sketch Panel Shortcut Menu In the graphics window. In this lesson you learn about the different constraints available and how they can be used. Inc. right-click and click Create Constraint. Access Methods The following methods can be used to access the 2D geometric constraints. The following image shows the 2D geometric constraints available from the 2D Sketch Panel.Geometric Constraints Procedure Geometric Constraints You can apply several different types of geometric constraints to your sketch geometry. Each constraint type offers a unique capability and is used to create a specific constraint condition. All Rights Reserved 99 .

Arcs 100 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . Can constraint a line to a point Constrains circles or arcs to share the same center point location Constrains the geometry to lie along the same line Constrains the geometry to lie parallel to the X axis of the sketch coordinate system Constrains the geometry to lie parallel to the Y axis of the sketch coordinate system Constrains the geometry to have equal radii or lines to have the same length Constrains the geometry to fixed at its current position relative to the sketch coordinate system Constrains geometry to be symmetrical about a selected centerline Line. Point. Circles. Pairs of Points (including Midpoints) Lines. Arc Line. Circles.Constraint Potential Sketch Elements Line Constraint Condition Created Constrained geometry is parallel to each other Constrained geometry is tangent to each other Constrains two points together. Center Point Circle. Arcs Lines. Points. Circle. Ellipse Axes Lines. Arcs Lines. Circles. Endpoint of Line. Points. Pairs of Points (including Midpoints) Lines. Arc Lines.

On the Panel Bar. On the Panel Bar. click the Horizontal constraint tool. line. The selected geometry is now constrained to be Equal in size.Applying Constraints . 4. Apply a Horizontal Constraint 1.Process Overview The following steps present an overview to applying different types of geometric constraints. click the Equal constraint tool. 2. Select the circle. click the Horizontal constraint tool and select the geometry to be constrained. 3. Apply a Horizontal Constraint between a point and a midpoint 1. you have an opportunity to place additional types of constraints. or arc. Select a circle. Inc. or arc to apply the Equal constraint. On the Panel Bar. line. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. In the exercise portion of this lesson. All Rights Reserved 101 . Apply an Equal Constraint 1.

3. 102 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . Select a point such as the endpoint of a line or center of a circle.2. The geometry is now constrained horizontally based upon the two points selected. Select the midpoint of an existing line.

On the Panel Bar. Select the second sketch element for the constraint. Continue selecting other sketch elements to apply the Symmetric constraint. 2. 4.Apply a Symmetrical Constraint 1. Select a sketch element to be used for the symmetry line. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. 3. All Rights Reserved 103 . Inc. click the Symmetric constraint tool. 5. Select the first sketch element for the constraint. Tip: You only need to select the symmetry line once during the current session of the Symmetric Constraint tool.

you must add constraints or delete existing constraints. Concept In this lesson you learn how to plan constraints for your 2D sketch geometry.Planning Constraints As you create sketch geometry. If required. • Analyze automatically applied constraints. you should determine whether any degrees of freedom remain on the sketch. As you create sketch geometry. 104 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . those constraints do not always completely represent your design intent. However. After the sketch is created. Following are some key concepts regarding constraint planning. During the sketch creation process. Therefore. • Determine sketch dependencies. determine how sketch elements relate to each other and apply the appropriate sketch constraints. constraints are automatically applied. some constraints are automatically applied. delete the automatically applied constraints and apply constraints to remove the degrees of freedom.

It is not necessary to fully constrain sketch geometry in order to create 3D features. In some situations you may be required to leave sketch geometry underconstrained. take into account the design intent and the degrees of freedom remaining on the sketch. All Rights Reserved 105 . If necessary use the Fix constraint to fix portions of the sketch. As you place the parametric dimensions. By stabilizing the geometry with constraints. • Stabilize shape before size. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. When you apply constraints to your sketch geometry. you will be able to predict the effect the dimensions will have on the sketch geometry. Before you place dimensions on your sketch elements. Inc. the sketch elements update to reflect the correct size. you should constrain the sketch to prevent the geometry from distorting. You can use the constraint-drag technique to see the remaining degrees of freedom on the sketch.• Use only needed constraints.

It is important to understand that constraints and dimensions work together to constrain the geometry. Some constraint combinations may distort underconstrained portions of your sketch. you can correct this distortion and generate a sketch that is properly constrained and meets your design intent.• Place dimensions on large elements before small ones. By placing dimensions on larger elements first. • Use both geometric constraints and dimensions. By using a combination of geometric constraints and parametric dimensions. you can minimize distortion on the sketch as it updates to reflect the dimensioned values. 106 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching .

leave those features underconstrained. When constraining sketches. This will allow the feature to change as the design evolves. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.• Identify sketch elements that might change size. All Rights Reserved 107 . Inc. When you identify sketch features that may change. you will intentionally leave features underconstrained to enable them to adapt to other parts in the assembly. take into account features that may change as the design evolves. In the case of adaptive parts.

108 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . The geometry referenced by the selected constraint will be highlighted.Showing and Deleting Constraints As you create and constrain your 2D sketches. On the Show Constraints toolbar. select the constraint symbol and press DELETE. On the Show Constraints toolbar. select the constraint(s) and delete them. Lock the Constraint Toolbar. or right-click the selected constraint and click Delete. 2D Sketch Panel Show/Delete Constraints Toolbar Viewing Constraints. Deleting Constraints. Procedure Access Methods The following method can be used to access the Show/Delete Constraints tool. Click the PushPin icon on the Show Constraints toolbar to leave the toolbar displayed until you close it. you may need to view and possibly delete some constraints. click the constraint. The Show Constraints tool enables you to view the constraints applied to the selected geometry and if necessary.

press DELETE. or select the geometry. Pausing over the geometry will display the Show Constraints toolbar temporarily until you move your cursor away from the toolbar.Locked Mode Select the constraint symbol to view the geometry referenced by the constraint.Temporary Mode 3. 2. Inc. or right-click the constraint symbol and click Delete. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. On the Panel Bar. To delete the constraint. Show Constraints Toolbar . 1.Process Overview The following steps present an overview for using the Show/Delete Constraints tool. Selecting the geometry will display the toolbar permanently until you close it. click the Show Constraints tool. You can lock the temporary toolbar by selecting the PushPin icon. 4. Show Constraints Toolbar . Pause over. All Rights Reserved 109 .

Shortcut Menu Right-click in the graphics window and click Show All Constraints.Hide all constraints The Constraint toolbars will appear next to each sketch element.Show All Constraints The Show All Constraints tool enables you to see all constraints applied to the active sketch geometry. Procedure Access Methods The following methods can be used to access the Show All Constraints tool.Show all constraints F9 . Pause over or select the constraint symbol to highlight the constrained geometry.) F8 . (Sketch must be active. Show/Delete Constraint toolbars are displayed next to each sketch element. Select the constraint symbol and press DELETE to delete the constraint. Keyboard Shortcut Sketch Showing All Constraints 110 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . Click and drag on the vertical bars of the toolbars to move them to another location. When you select the Show All Constraints tool.

In this lesson you learn how to create and constrain construction geometry. construction lines are used to position the slot from the center of the circle and along the angled construction line. Sketch Containing Construction Geometry Process Overview . 1. constrain. All Rights Reserved 111 . To do this.Creating Construction Geometry The following steps present an overview for creating construction geometry. Concept You can use construction geometry as a reference for dimensions to other normal sketch geometry as well as to constrain normal sketch geometry.Use Construction Geometry in the Sketch There may be times when you need to place geometry in your sketch that you do not want to be included in the 3D feature. Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. you create. the construction geometry is ignored. and dimension construction geometry just like any other 2D sketch geometry but when a 3D feature is created. Standard Toolbar In the following image below. Create a new sketch or activate an existing sketch. Access Methods Use the following method to access the Construction geometry style.

Constrain and dimension the geometry as required. select Normal from the Styles drop-down list. 112 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . 5.2. select Construction. on the Standard toolbar. On the Sketch Panel Bar. On the Standard toolbar. Converting Normal Geometry to Construction Geometry Tip You can convert normal geometry to construction geometry by selecting the geometry. As you sketch the geometry it will be created as construction geometry. 6. select Construction from the Styles drop-down list. To switch back to normal geometry creation. 3. 4. click one of the sketch tools to create the geometry. then on the Standard Toolbar in the Styles drop-down list. Continue sketching geometry as required.

Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. click Exercise: Constraining Sketches The completed exercise is shown in the following image. From the Main table of contents page. you create and constrain both normal and construction geometry. Sketched features are used in this exercise. More information on these features is presented in the next chapter. Using the concepts and procedures learned in this lesson. Simple Part with Constrained Sketches Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. you create and constrain sketch geometry. Inc. All Rights Reserved 113 .Exercise: Constraining Sketches In this exercise. 2. click Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching From the table of contents for Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching.

you will be able to: • • • • • • Create various types of parametric dimensions Create and use driven dimensions on your sketch Use additional options when applying dimensions Create and apply dimensions to your sketch using the Automatic Dimensioning tool Use different formats when displaying dimensions on your sketch Understand best practices for dimensioning your sketch 114 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . 3D Part with Parametric Dimensions Objectives After completing this lesson.Dimensioning Sketches Overview Overview Overview Dimensioning your sketches is a major part of constraining the 2D geometry. In this lesson you learn how to create and use various types of dimensions on your 2D sketch geometry. dimensions size the sketch according to your design intent. While geometric constraints stabilize the sketch and make it predictable.

Procedure Unlike 2D CAD applications where dimensions are simply numeric representations of the size of the geometry. Autodesk Inventor places the appropriate type of dimension based on the geometry that you select. Several types of parametric dimensions are available but only one dimension tool is used to create them. This technology enables you to quickly change a dimension and immediately see the effect the change has on the geometry. dimensions are used to drive the size of the geometry. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the General Dimension tool: Standard Toolbar Keyboard Shortcut D The following image shows various types of dimensions that you can apply to sketch geometry. All Rights Reserved 115 .Parametric Dimensions Adding parametric dimensions is the final step in fully constraining your sketch geometry. When placing dimensions. the shortcut menu displays additional options for placing the dimension. in a parametric 3D modeling application. Inc. When you apply a parametric dimension to a sketch element. the sketch element changes size to reflect the value of the dimension. Sketch Elements with Various Dimensions Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

116 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . Place the dimension Select the dimension and enter a new value Geometry changes to reflect new dimension c. Right−click in the graphics window and click Done on the shortcut menu. Linear Dimension: a. Radial/Diameter Dimension: a. Select the sketch element for the linear dimension and follow the sequence below. click the General Dimension tool. click the General Dimension tool. Place the dimension Select the dimension and enter a new value Geometry changes to reflect new dimension c. Right−click in the graphics window and click Done on the shortcut menu. b. Select the sketch element for the radial/diameter dimension and follow the sequence below. or continue placing additional dimensions. b. On the Panel Bar. or continue placing additional dimensions.Process Overview .Applying Parametric Dimensions This section presents the processes for applying different types of parametric dimensions. On the Panel Bar.

Tip: You could also right-click before positioning the dimension and click Aligned on the shortcut menu to set the dimension type as an Aligned dimension. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. When creating an angular dimension select each line at a point on other than their endpoints. Position the cursor near the geometry. click the General Dimension tool. On the Panel Bar. or continue placing additional dimensions. Click when the Aligned Dimension icon is displayed c. Select the sketch each element for the angular dimension and follow the sequence below. click the General Dimension tool. All Rights Reserved 117 .Angular Dimension: a. Place the dimension Select the dimension and enter a new value Geometry changes to reflect new dimension Right−click in the graphics window and click Done on the shortcut menu. b. Inc. c. or continue placing additional dimensions. Place the dimension Select the dimension and enter a new value Geometry changes to reflect new dimension d. Aligned Dimension: a. Right−click in the graphics window and click Done on the shortcut menu. Select the sketch element for the aligned dimension and follow the sequence below. b. On the Panel Bar.

When you enter a unit suffix. the default mode is Diameter. To specify a value of 50 centimeters in the same part. When dimensioning a circle. • Radial/Diameter dimension options: When you place a dimension on a arc or circle. • Linear dimension options: When you place a linear dimension to a line or 118 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . you would enter 50 cm. centimeter. the Edit Dimension dialog box will appear automatically after each dimension is placed. If your part consists of multiple units of measurement you must enter the non-default unit suffixes. • Display Edit Dimension dialog box automatically: While placing a dimension. if the default unit of measurement is millimeters. For example 50 cm would be evaluated correctly while 50 CM is not valid. the default mode is Radius. right-click in the graphics window and on the shortcut menu. It is not necessary to enter the suffix of the default unit. click Edit Dimension. Values shown in red indicate an improper value or format. and foot. When dimensioning an arc. it must be entered in lowercase. Unit suffixes and parameters are case-sensitive.Entering Values Autodesk Inventor understands specific units of measurement such as millimeter. right-click in the graphics window and on the shortcut menu. With this option set. For example. click Diameter or Radius to switch the default mode of the current dimension. you would enter a value of 50 millimeters as 50 with no suffix. Additional Dimension Options The following list represents additional options available on the shortcut menu when you place dimensions. meter. while values shown in black are considered to be valid. inch. Autodesk Inventor evaluates the values as you enter them.

Inc. • Dimensioning to quadrants: When you need to place a dimension to the quadrant of a circle. right-click in the graphics window and on the shortcut menu. All Rights Reserved 119 . its parameter is also deleted and the original dimension name is not used again in the current part file. d4. You can rename the default dimension names and modify their values in the Parameters dialog box. Select the arc or circle at the point where the glyph appears. Dimensions Stored as Parameters Each dimension you create is automatically named and stored as a parameter in the current part file. place the cursor near the quadrant and look for the quadrant dimension glyph. These names are automatically generated each time a dimension is placed. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. click the desired dimension type. Dimensions Listed as Model Parameters Notice the parameter names d3. d5 and so on.two points at an angle. If you delete a dimension. Selecting the Parameters tool will display the Parameters dialog box listing the Model Parameters.

you must set the dimension style to Driven. Once all the degrees of freedom have been removed. This option is available only if the General Dimension tool is active or one or more existing dimensions are currently selected. Each parametric dimension you apply reduces the degrees of freedom available on each sketch. The value of a driven dimension changes if the geometry it has been applied to changes. However. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the General Dimension tool and apply driven dimensions. the sketch is considered fully constrained and you are not allowed to place any additional constraints or parametric dimensions. when you create a driven dimension. from the Styles drop-down list. Unlike parametric dimensions which force the geometry to change size based on the dimension value. Because driven dimensions do not force the geometry to change. these dimensions will be parametric by default. they do not remove any degrees of freedom from the sketch. On the Standard toolbar. select Driven. Principle You create driven dimensions with the same dimension tool used for parametric dimensions.Driven Dimensions As you apply dimensions to your sketch geometry. Standard Toolbar Keyboard Shortcut D Fully Constrained Sketch Containing a Driven Dimension 120 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . driven dimensions are driven by the geometry.

if you attempt to apply a dimension that would overconstrain the sketch. Also available are tools designed to assist you in creating dimensions referenced from other features and/or dimensions. enabling you to control the display of the dimensions. additional options such as tolerances. you can reference an existing dimension by selecting the dimension in the graphics window. All Rights Reserved 121 . you will be given the option to create the dimension as a driven dimension. The dimension parameter name is automatically entered in the Edit Dimension dialog box. are available.Automatic Driven Dimensions Note As you place dimensions on your sketch. with the Edit Dimension dialog box open. select an existing dimension to reference. Click Accept to create a driven dimension based on your selection. Inc. When you want to reference other dimensions in a new dimension. The cursor Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Additional Options for Applying Dimensions When you apply dimensions to your sketch elements. The preceding image shows dimension d25 being created equal to dimension d24. Procedure Referencing Other Dimensions When you create a new dimension.

the following options are available on the Edit Dimension flyout. the parameter name of the dimension you selected is entered in the Edit Dimension dialog box. enabling you to select a User Parameter for use in the current dimension. After the dimensions are displayed you can select a dimension for use in the existing dimension. When you select the existing dimension.changes to indicate that you are referencing an existing dimension. The resulting value is placed in the Edit Dimension dialog box. Edit Dimension Dialog Box . List Parameters: Lists the current User Parameters in a window. 122 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching .Flyout Options When applying parametric dimensions. Select any value for use in the current dimension. Edit Dimension Flyout Measure: Enables you to measure another sketch element or 3D feature. Tolerance: Displays the Tolerance dialog box enabling you to assign a tolerance to the parametric dimension. Show Dimensions: Enables you to select a feature on the 3D part to display the underlying dimensions. The dimension being referenced can be used alone or in a formula. This option appears only if User Parameters have been created. Recently Used Values: Displays a list of recently used values.

Procedure For best results you should apply constraints and any dimensions you would prefer not be automatically calculated. All Rights Reserved 123 . If no sketch elements are selected. Although you can use the tool to dimension all sketch elements automatically by not selecting any elements and clicking the Apply button. Apply: Applies dimensions and constraints to the selected geometry. Tip: When this number is 2. Standard Toolbar Auto Dimension Dialog Box The following options are available in the Auto Dimension dialog box: Curves: Select the sketch elements to be automatically dimensioned. Access Methods Use the following method to access the Auto Dimension tool. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. The Auto Dimension tool is intended to be used in conjunction with the General Dimension tool and manually added or inferred constraints. This will not remove dimensions and/or constraints that you applied manually. Dimensions: When selected.Automatic Dimensioning The Auto Dimension tool applies constraints and dimensions to the entire sketch or only those sketch elements that are selected. all elements are considered for dimensioning. applies constraints to the sketch elements. you should select the geometry based on how you want the automatic dimensions applied. consider using at least one fix constraint or constrain the geometry to the origin of the sketch. Dimensions Required: Displays the number of dimensions required to fully constrain the sketch. Inc. applies dimensions to the sketch elements. Constraints: When selected. Manually applied dimensions and/or constraints will affect this number. Remove: Removes the dimensions and/or constraints applied by the Auto Dimension tool.

Create a new sketch and add the constraints and dimensions that you prefer not be automatically calculated. This ensures that critical constraints do not need to be automatically calculated.Automatic Dimensioning The following steps represent an overview for using the Auto Dimension tool. 2. 1. Notice the constraints that have been added manually.Done: Closes the dialog box. 124 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . click the Auto Dimension tool and select the geometry to be automatically dimensioned. Process Overview . On the Panel Bar.

Move the dimensions as required to clean up the automatic placement. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 125 .3. Inc. 5. click the Apply button to apply dimensions and constraints to the selected geometry. Use standard dimension editing techniques to adjust the dimension values as required. In the Auto Dimension dialog box. Click Done to close the dialog box. 4.

right-click in the graphics window and on the shortcut menu. Expression: Dimension is displayed as an expression. While in an active sketch. click Dimension Display.Displaying Dimensions You can control how dimensions are displayed in the graphics window by using different dimension display options. 126 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . You then select a dimension display option. Name: Dimension is displayed as a parameter name. Procedure Dimension Display Options The following options are available on the Dimension Display submenu: Value: Dimension is displayed as nominal value.

and then use the Auto Dimension tool to speed up the dimensioning process. if the first dimension changes. Place large dimensions before small ones. Use geometric constraints when possible. Guidelines for Dimensioning Sketches Consider the following guidelines when adding dimensions to your sketch: Principle • • • • Use the General Dimension tool to place critical dimensions. With this relationship. Precise Value: Dimension is displayed as precise value regardless of precision setting. All Rights Reserved 127 . if two dimensions are supposed to be the same value. place a perpendicular constraint instead of an angle dimension of 90 degrees. For example. • Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. For example.Tolerance: Dimension is displayed with tolerance values. Incorporate relationships between dimensions. the other dimension changes as well. reference one dimension to the other. Inc. Consider both dimensional and geometric constraints to meet the overall design intent.

2. From the Main table of contents page. 3D Part with Parametric Dimensions 128 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . click Exercise: Dimensioning Sketches The completed exercise is shown in the following image. apply a combination of parametric and driven dimensions to the sketch geometry. you apply dimensions to a sketch. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. Using the techniques learned in this lesson.Exercise: Dimensioning Sketches In this exercise. click Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching From the table of contents for Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching.

and dimension a sketch as show here.Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Sketching Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Sketching Print Exercise Reference In this exercise. Inc. 2. click Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching From the table of contents for Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching. you create a new part file and using the techniques and concepts learned in this chapter. All Rights Reserved 129 . constrain. Fully Constrained and Dimensioned Sketch Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. From the Main table of contents page. create. click Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Sketching The completed exercise is shown in the following image. To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.

How to create and edit 2D sketches.Chapter Summary Summary You learned the following in this chapter: Summary • • • • • • • • • • Basic rules for creating sketches. Fix common problems associated with sketches. How to constrain 2D sketches in Autodesk Inventor. How to display dimensions Guidelines and best practices for dimensioning sketches. 130 Chapter 2: Introduction to Sketching . How to use construction geometry when creating 2D sketches. What makes parametric and driven dimensions different. About the types of constraints available and what types of geometry they can be applied to. How to apply parametric dimension to 2D sketches.

Creating profiles containing multiple closed loops. Using the Extrude tool to create extruded features. Create revolved features using the Revolve tool. Create reference geometry from existing part geometry. Use existing part faces to define new sketch planes. . Create extruded features using the Extrude tool. Using the Revolve tool to create revolved features. you will be able to. Specify termination options when you create extruded features. • • • • • • • • • • • • • Sketched features. and Intersect feature relationships.Creating Simple Sketched Features Chapter Introduction In this chapter you learn about.. • • • • • • • In this chapter After completing this chapter. Use the Sketch tool to create new sketches.. Specifying different termination options for extrude features Editing features after you have created them. Cut.. Edit revolved features. Sharing sketch geometry. Consumed and unconsumed sketches. Base and secondary features.. Using part faces to define a sketch Application options that enable you to automatically project edges on a new sketch. Creating sketch planes. • • Create sketches and profiles for use in sketch features. Edit extruded features. The Join.

In this lesson you learn the concept of sketched features and how they are created. The term "sketched feature" refers to a 3D feature that is based on a 2D sketch.Introduction to Sketched Features Overview Overview Overview Three-dimensional (3D) features that you create in Autodesk Inventor fall into one of two categories: sketched features or placed features. you will be able to • • • • Understand the concept of simple sketched features Identify consumed and unconsumed sketches in your model Identify the two different types of profiles and options for working with closed loop profiles Share sketch features 132 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . Part Created Using a Single Shared Sketch Objectives After completing this lesson.

The first sketch feature you create is considered the base feature. Used for both base and secondary features. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Simple Sketched Features . After you create the base feature. These features serve as the basis for most of your designs using Autodesk Inventor. All Rights Reserved 133 . For simple sketched features. Typical Sketched Feature Creation The image below represents a typical workflow for creating a 3D part based upon sketched features.Concept You create your 3D model by using multiple sketches representing various profiles of the 3D part and building on those sketches with sketch features. The base sketch is created which is used to create the base feature. you begin by first creating the sketch or profile for the 3D feature. sketched features are 3D features that are created from an existing 2D sketch. additional sketched and/or placed features are added to the 3D model.Simple Sketched Features As the name implies. Inc. multiple sketches can be created and used within one sketch feature. Creation of Sketched Features Sketched Feature Attributes The key attributes of sketched features are as follows: • • • Requires an unconsumed sketch. Secondary sketches and features are then added to the 3D model. For more complex sketched features. this profile usually represents a 2D section of the 3D feature being created. The result of the sketched feature can add or remove mass from the 3D geometry. When you create a sketched feature. As you add the additional sketched features. options are available that control whether the secondary sketched features will add or remove material from the existing 3D geometry.

Consumed and Unconsumed Sketches When you create a new part. When you create the 3D sketched feature. the initial sketch is created for you automatically. the sketch is considered unconsumed and can be used for any sketched feature. In most cases you use this default sketch for the basis of your 3D geometry. After the sketch is created. the sketch itself becomes consumed by the 3D sketched feature. Unconsumed Sketch Consumed Sketches The following image shows sketches consumed by the sketched features. you create a sketched feature. In the browser. such as Extrude or Revolve. Unconsumed Sketch The image below shows the initial sketch before it is consumed by the sketched feature. Prior to this time. to create 3D geometry from the initial sketch. the sketches are nested below the sketched feature in which they were used. Consumed Sketches 134 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features .

Share Sketch: Shares the sketch making it available for additional sketch features. Edit Coordinate System: Activates the sketch enabling you to adjust the sketch coordinate system. For example. right-click on the sketch to access these options. Any changes you make to the sketch are reflected in the 3D geometry. or reposition the sketch origin. Sketch Shortcut Menu The following options are available on the Sketch shortcut menu: Edit Sketch: Activates the sketch environment for editing. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. In the browser. its visibility is automatically turned off. Visibility: When a sketch is consumed by a feature. you could change the direction of the current X or Y axes. This option sets the visibility of the sketch to On. Any changes you make are reflected in the 3D geometry.Options for Consumed Sketches After the sketch has been consumed. All Rights Reserved 135 . you still have access to the sketch for editing and other operations. Redefine: Enables you to redefine the plane on which the sketch was created. Create Note: Attaches a note to the sketch using the Engineer's Notebook interface. Inc.

When you create sketched features from these types of profiles. note the ability to select only the profiles you want included in the sketched feature. There are two different types of profiles: open and closed. a sketch containing multiple closed loop profiles is used to create an extruded feature. Multiple Closed Loop Profiles In the following image.Sketches and Profiles When you create sketches it is possible to create sketch geometry that contains multiple profiles. In the bottom image. you are able to select any individual closed profile or multiple closed profiles to be included in the feature. Open profiles are used to create paths and surfaces and can also appear as the result of projecting reference geometry. Sketch Containing Multiple Closed Loop Profiles 136 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . Closed profiles are the most common and are used to create 3D geometry. you may end up with multiple closed loop profiles. In this situation you have one sketch containing multiple closed profiles. The closed profiles in some cases may intersect each other. Concept As you build more complex sketches.

Shortcut Menu . sharing the sketch is an alternative to creating multiple sketches. Sharing Sketch Features . When you share the sketch its geometry becomes available for an unlimited number of additional sketched features.Sharing Sketch Features You can reuse an existing sketch after it as been consumed by the sketched feature--this is referred to as sharing a sketch. right-click on a consumed sketch and click Share Sketch. Shortcut Menu In the Browser. If your sketch contains geometry that is meant to define separate features on the part. Inc. Access Methods Use the following method to share a sketch.Procedure Under certain circumstances.Share Sketch Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. you can share the sketch thereby making it available for additional sketched features. All Rights Reserved 137 .

You must manually turn off visibility for a shared sketch. 138 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features .The following image shows a sketch that has been shared and is being used in two sketched features. The icon is colored indicating that the sketch (and any dimensions added) will remain visible. be certain this is the method you want to use to accomplish your design intent.Shared Sketch • • • The hand indicates the sketch has been shared. After you share a sketch. Share with Caution! Tip Before you share a sketch. Part/Assembly Browser . even after being consumed by the sketched feature. there is no way to "un-share" or delete the shared sketch.

click Exercise: Introduction to Sketched Features 2. Part Created Using a Single Shared Sketch Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. click Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features From the table of contents for Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. From the Main table of contents page. You then share the sketch to make it available for additional features.Exercise: Introduction to Sketched Features In this exercise. All Rights Reserved 139 . you create some simple sketched features from a sketch consisting of multiple closed loop profiles. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. Inc.

Completed Pillar Block Objectives After completing this lesson. you will be able to • • • • Use the Sketch tool to create new sketch planes Define a new sketch plane based upon an existing part face Reference existing model edge geometry when you create sketches Create reference geometry 140 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . In this lesson you learn how to work with sketch planes.Working with Sketch Planes Overview Overview Overview Every sketch you create defines a 2D plane on which your sketch geometry is created. and you learn about creating and referencing sketch geometry.

When you select the Sketch tool on the Standard toolbar.The Sketch Tool You use the Sketch tool to create new sketches or to activate existing sketches. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. select an existing sketch. click the Sketch tool and in the browser. Inc. All Rights Reserved 141 . you are prompted to select a plane to create a sketch or an existing sketch to edit. The existing sketch is activated for editing. You can select planes or sketches in the graphics window or in the browser. • Activate an existing sketch On the Standard toolbar. Procedure Standard Toolbar Using the Sketch Tool The following examples show potential uses of the Sketch tool.

click the Sketch tool and select a plane or face on the part. use one of the following methods: On the Standard toolbar.• Create a new sketch On the Standard toolbar. 142 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . aligned to the selected face. click the Return button or. • • • • To exit the sketch. Right-click in the graphics window and click Finish Sketch on the shortcut menu. click the Sketch tool or On the Standard toolbar. A new sketch is created.

Creating Sketch Planes on a Part Face The following examples demonstrate how to create sketch planes on a part face. the new sketch plane can be created directly on the selected face or offset from the selected face to a specified distance. The sketch plane is created on the selected face. Procedure Standard Toolbar Shortcut Menu Right-click on a part face and click New Sketch.Using a Part Face to Define a Sketch One of the most common methods for creating new sketches is to use a part face to define your sketch plane. • Create a new sketch plane aligned to a selected face Right-click on a face of the part click New Sketch on the shortcut menu. Using this method. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. You can create new sketch planes on any flat surface of an existing part. All Rights Reserved 143 .

click the Sketch tool 2.In the Offset dialog box. The sketch plane is created offset from the selected face at the distance you specified. 144 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . offset from a selected face 1. An offset dialog box is displayed.On the Standard toolbar. 3. enter a value for the offset and click the green checkmark.Click on the face and drag the sketch plane away from the selected face.• Create a new sketch plane.

All Rights Reserved 145 . This geometry is known as reference geometry. Without this reference geometry. the edges of the selected face are projected onto the new sketch when you create a new sketch plane on an existing face. the edges of the selected face are automatically projected onto the new sketch. Inc. it would be otherwise impossible to dimension or constrain new sketch geometry to existing features on the 3D part. Options Dialog Box . • Create a new sketch on an existing part face. When you create new sketch planes on existing model faces.Sketch Tab When you select the Autoproject Edges for Sketch Creation and Edit option on the Sketch tab in the Options dialog box. Procedure Uses for Direct Model Edge References Following are potential uses for edge references: • • • For dimensions to new sketch geometry For relational constraints to new sketch geometry As the basis for new sketched features Application Options .Direct Model Edge Referencing Direct model edge referencing refers to a process in which you reference existing model edge geometry in the creation of new sketch geometry. The edges of the existing part face Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Sketch Tab Referencing Model Edge Geometry The following examples demonstrate how to reference model edge geometry when creating new sketches.

Note the appearance of the Adaptive indicator. This concept is known as 146 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . On the Panel Bar. This icon indicates the feature is adaptive to the referenced part in the assembly.are automatically projected onto the new sketch. The new sketch geometry is created by projected the edges of the selected face. Create new sketch geometry and use the projected reference geometry for dimensions and/or constraints. click the Project Geometry tool and select a face on another part in the assembly. this feature will automatically update to reflect the changes. • • Direct model edge referencing in the context of an assembly: Create a new sketch on a face of the active part. If the source geometry projected onto the new sketch changes.

Adaptivity and is covered in greater detail later in this course. As a result. All Rights Reserved 147 . To demonstrate Adaptivity. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. the projected geometry updates to reflect the changes in the source part. the source geometry on the first part in the assembly has been modified. Inc.

If this option is not selected. As you select the geometry. If the source geometry changes. If you project geometry from another part in the assembly. This option is found on the Assembly tab in the Options dialog box. Adaptivity is beyond the scope of this chapter but is covered in greater detail later in this course. the geometry is associative only if the Cross Part Geometry Projection option is selected.Creating Reference Geometry You cannot draw reference geometry. it is projected onto the current sketch plane and is created as reference geometry. the reference geometry is still created. Access Methods You can use the following tools to create reference geometry: Panel Bar Panel Bar Reference Geometry Attributes Following are some key attributes for reference geometry: • • • • • • Can be used as the basis for dimensions to new sketch geometry Can be used to apply relational constraints to new sketch geometry Cannot be dimensioned Cannot be trimmed Can be mirrored Cannot be drawn. The only way to create it is by using the Project Geometry tool. you are prompted to select geometry to project onto the current sketch plane. it is always associative to the original source geometry. however. When you select this tool. Procedure When you project geometry from the same part. can only be created by using Project Geometry tool or by selecting the Autoproject Edges option 148 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . the reference geometry will also change. it is not associative to the original source geometry.

Application Options . projecting geometry from other parts in the assembly will create associative (adaptive) reference geometry. Applications Options Dialog Box .Sketch Tab When the Autoproject Edges During Curve Creation option is selected. All Rights Reserved 149 . you can autoproject geometry by hovering the pointer over the geometry to be projected while sketching.Application Options .Assembly Tab Application Options . Inc.Assembly Tab With the Enable Associative Edge/Loop Geometry Projection During In-Place Modeling option selected on the Assembly tab in the Options dialog box.Sketch Tab Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

Sketching Shortcut Menu While sketching. Shortcut Menu . Create a new sketch on the existing part. click the Project Geometry tool and select the geometry to project onto the current sketch. On the Panel Bar. 150 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . 2. This will enable you to hover over geometry to automatically project onto the current sketch plane. 1.Process Overview The following procedures represent an overview for creating reference geometry.AutoProject Creating Reference Geometry . right-click in the graphics window and click AutoProject on the shortcut menu.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Tip: You may consider turning off the AutoProject option until it is needed again. This will prevent the accidental projection of geometry while sketching over existing part features. Right-click in the graphics window and click AutoProject on the shortcut menu. Create a new sketch on the existing part. All Rights Reserved 151 . 3. Inc. Begin sketching the required geometry. Hover over the geometry to project. 4. 2. It will be automatically projected to the current sketch plane. Continue sketching the required geometry as required.To autoproject geometry during curve creation: 1.

click Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features From the table of contents for Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features. you create several sketched features based upon different sketch planes. Print Exercise Reference Note: Some 3D features are used in this exercise that will be covered in greater depth later in the course.Exercise: Working with Sketch Planes In this exercise. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. click Exercise: Working with Sketch Planes 2. Completed Pillar Block 152 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. From the Main table of contents page. For each sketch you will be required to create reference geometry and use direct model edge referencing.

you will be able to • • • • • Understand extruded features and how to create them Use the Extrude tool to create extruded features Understand the concept of using the Join. In this lesson you learn how to create extruded features using different termination options and how to edit the feature and profiles used to create them. you can also edit the underlying sketch profiles used in the extruded feature. As you create these features you can adjust the feature relationship options for Join. Cut. Cut. Inc.Creating Extruded Features Overview Overview Overview One of the most common sketched features is the extruded feature. and Intersect. After the feature is created. and Intersect options when you create extruded features Use the various termination options when you create extruded features Edit extruded features and the profiles used to create them Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 153 . Index Slide Objectives After completing this lesson.

the sketch contains multiple closed loop profiles selected to form a single extruded feature. If the profile being extruded is open. Examples of Simple Extruded Profiles In this example. Example of Extruded Features In this example. you can choose between a solid or surface for the result of the extrusion. the extrusion direction is always perpendicular to the sketch profile being used. the extrusion will result in a surface.Overview of Extruded Features An extruded feature is a sketched feature in which a profile is extruded to a distance specified by a value or based upon different termination options. the sketch contains multiple closed loop profiles selected to form a single extruded feature with holes. Procedure Although it is possible to taper the faces of the extruded feature. Example of Extruded Feature 154 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . If the profile being extruded is closed.

Panel Bar Shortcut Menu The Extrude dialog box is opened when you start the Extrude tool. Solid or Surface. Extrude Dialog Box The following features and options are available in the Extrude dialog box: Profile: Click this button to select geometry to be included in the extrusion. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. that profile is selected automatically when you start the Extrude tool. Procedure Extrude Tool . A red arrow indicates that no profiles have been selected for the extrusion feature.Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Extrude tool. you are required to select the profiles to be included in the extruded feature. If the sketch contains a single closed profile. If the sketch contains more than one profile. Considered a sketched feature. All Rights Reserved 155 .The Extrude Tool You use the Extrude tool to create extruded features from existing sketch profiles. Inc. Output: Specify the desired output option. extrude features require an unconsumed and visible sketch to be available.

Create a new sketch. The extruded feature is created.Direction: Select the direction icon or click and drag the preview of the extrusion in the desired direction. Adjust the options as required and click OK. 3. Creating Extruded Features . 156 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features .Process Overview Following is an overview of the process for creating extruded features. 2. click the Extrude tool. 1. On the Panel Bar.

6. 5. The additional extruded feature is added to the part.4. 7. Adjust the options as required and click OK. Inc. All Rights Reserved 157 . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Create additional sketch geometry as required. Create additional sketch geometry. click the Extrude tool. On the Panel Bar.

158 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . On the Panel Bar. click the Extrude tool. Adjust the options as required and click OK. The additional extruded feature is added to the part.8. 9.

Cut. All Rights Reserved 159 . Dialog Box . and Intersect When you create extruded features you have the ability to adjust feature relationship options to control the effect of the current feature on existing features. These options are not available for the first feature of the part. Concept The feature relationship options are available in the Extrude dialog box. Cut: This option cuts the result of the extruded feature being created from the existing part. Using this option results in material being added to the existing part. Note the green preview indicating material is being added.Feature Relationship Options Join: This option joins the result of the extruded feature being created to existing part geometry. Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Note the red preview indicating material is being removed.Feature Relationships .Join. Using this option results in material being removed from the existing part.

you can specify termination options for the feature in the Extrude dialog box. Depending on the option you choose. Procedure Extrude Dialog Box . different interface options are available.Intersect: This option removes material from the existing part by comparing the volume of the existing features and the feature being created and leaving only the volume shared between the existing features and the new feature. Specifying termination options enables you to control where the feature starts and ends. Note the blue preview indicating an Intersect relationship. Specifying Termination When you create extruded features.Termination Options Distance: This option extrudes the profile according to the distance specified. 160 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features .

Use the Terminator icon to select a solid or surface on which to terminate the extrusion. If the selected termination face does not completely enclose the extrusion profile. From To: This option extrudes the profile by starting the extrusion at the face selected in the From option and ending the extrusion at the second face selected. Inc. All Rights Reserved 161 .To Next: This option extrudes the profile to the next possible face or plane. To: This option extrudes the profile to terminate on the selected face or plane. If necessary. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. select the extend face option to terminate the feature on the extended face. use the extend face options.

If the part changes. the extruded feature will continue to go all the way through the part. 162 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features .All: This option extrudes the profile all the way through the part.

feature relationships. In the Browser.Editing Features After you create an extruded feature. All Rights Reserved 163 . Because it is a sketched feature. When you edit the feature. right-click the feature and click Edit Sketch on the shortcut menu. Edit Sketch: Select this option to activate the sketch for editing. Procedure When you right-click on a feature. and add or remove geometry from the sketch. To edit the sketch. you may be required to edit the extruded feature. Depending on the changes made at the sketch level. there are two potential items that can be edited: the feature itself or the underlying sketch that was used to create the feature. The following options are available on the Feature shortcut menu: Edit Feature: Select this option to open the Extrude dialog box. 1. All options used in creating the feature can be modified. and termination options and also reselect geometry to be included in the feature. All changes are reflected in the extruded feature. you are presented with the same dialog box that you used when you created the feature. All sketch tools are available for editing the geometry. you can edit it at any time. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. While editing the sketch. you are able to change the parameters such as distance. Inc. you can change dimensions and constraints. When you edit an extruded feature. Feature Shortcut Menu Editing Extrude Features .Process Overview Following is an overview of the process for editing extruded features. locate the feature you want to edit. the shortcut menu is displayed.

In the Browser. 4. 5. make the changes required to the sketch. 164 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . In the Extrude dialog box. adjust the options as required to edit the feature and click OK. Using standard sketch tools. click the Return button to exit the sketch. On the Standard toolbar. right-click the feature and click Edit Feature on the shortcut menu. 3.2.

The completed exercise is shown in the following image. click Exercise: Creating Extruded Features 2. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.Exercise: Creating Extruded Features In this exercise. while you will be required to create other sketch geometry. you will build an Index Slide part file using several extrude features. Some initial geometry has been created. click Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features From the table of contents for Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features. Index Slide Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. From the Main table of contents page. All Rights Reserved 165 .

As you create these features. you can also edit the underlying sketch profiles used in the revolved feature. Cut. After you create the feature. In this lesson you learn how to create revolved features using different feature relationship options and how to edit the feature and profiles used to create them.Creating Revolved Features Overview Overview Overview You create revolved features by revolving a profile about an axis. you will be able to • • • • Understand revolved features and how to create them Use the Revolve tool to create revolved features Understand the concept of using the Join. and Intersect options when you create revolved features Edit revolved features and the profiles used to create them 166 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . Cut. Indexer Part File Objectives After completing this lesson. you can adjust the feature relationship options for Join. and Intersect.

All Rights Reserved 167 . Example of Revolved Feature Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Example of Revolved Features In this example. If the profile being extruded is closed. Procedure Examples of Simple Revolved Profiles In this example. the centerline is automatically selected as the axis of revolution. you can choose between a solid or surface for the result of the extrusion. The profile is revolved with the Cut feature relationship. the sketch contains a closed profile and one centerline.Overview of Revolved Features A revolved feature is a sketched feature in which a profile is revolved about an axis. When you start the Extrude tool. and one centerline. the extrusion results in a surface. Inc. the sketch contains a single closed loop profile. If the profile being extruded is open. You can revolve the profile at a full 360 degrees or at an angle specified. reference geometry.

Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Revolve tool. If the sketch contains more than one profile. Extents: Select the desired option from the drop-down list. it will be selected automatically as the axis for the revolved feature. if the sketch contains a single closed profile. Output: Select the desired output option: Solid or Surface. Procedure Revolve Tool . Angle: This option enables you to specify an angle and direction for the revolution. The Revolve tool requires an unconsumed and visible sketch to be available. A red arrow indicates that no profiles have been selected for the revolved feature. If the sketch contains a centerline. Axis: Click this icon to select the line segment to use as the axis for the revolve feature. you are required to select the profiles to be included in the feature. 168 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features .The Revolve Tool You use the Revolve tool to create revolved features from existing sketch profiles. that profile is selected automatically. Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Revolve Dialog Box The following options are available in the Revolve dialog box: Profile: Click this button to select geometry to be included in the revolved feature. Tip: If the sketch contains a centerline it is selected automatically as the axis. When you start the Revolve tool.

Direction: Select the direction icon or click and drag the preview of the revolve in the desired direction. 1. Create a new sketch containing a profile to revolve. If the profile is being revolved about a centerline. In the Revolve dialog box. consider using the Centerline style on the line segment. adjust the options as required and click OK. 2. All Rights Reserved 169 . Creating Revolved Features . Inc.Full: This option revolves the profile 360 degrees. This option is available only if the Extents option is set to Angle. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. On the Panel Bar.Process Overview The following steps present an overview for creating revolved features. click the Revolve tool.

3. Click OK. Create additional sketch geometry as required. 4. Select the geometry to be included in the revolved feature and adjust the options as required. On the Panel Bar. 170 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . click the Revolve tool.

These options are not available for the first feature of the part. and Intersect. Using this option results in material being added to the existing part. The feature relationship options are Join. Note the red preview indicating material is being removed.Feature Relationships . and Intersect When you create revolved features you have the ability to adjust feature relationship options to control the effect of the current feature on existing features. All Rights Reserved 171 . Concept Revolve Dialog Box . Cut. Cut: This option cuts the result of the revolved feature being created from the existing part. Using this option results in material being removed from the existing part. Cut. Inc.Join.Feature Relationship Options Join: This option joins the result of the revolved feature being created to existing part geometry. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Note the green preview indicating material is being added.

Note the blue preview indicating an Intersect relationship. 172 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features .Intersect: This option removes material from the existing part by comparing the volume of the existing features and the feature being created and leaving only the volume shared between the existing features and the new feature.

you are able to change the parameters such as angle and feature relationships. you can change dimensions and constraints. All options used in creating the feature can be modified. Depending on the changes made at the sketch level. Procedure The following options are available on the shortcut menu when you right-click on a revolved feature. When you edit a revolved feature. there are two potential items that can be edited: the feature itself or the underlying sketch that was used to create the feature. and also reselect geometry to be included in the feature. you can edit it at any time. All Rights Reserved 173 .Editing Features After the revolved feature is created. Inc. All changes will be reflected in the revolved feature. Because it is a sketched feature. While editing the sketch. Feature Shortcut Menu Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. and even add or remove geometry from the sketch. Edit Feature: Displays the Revolve dialog box. you may be required to edit the revolved feature. All sketch tools are available for editing the geometry. you are presented with the same dialog box that was used when you created the feature. When you edit the feature. Edit Sketch: Activates the sketch for editing.

On the Standard toolbar. 2. adjust the options as required and click OK. 3. In the Browser. Using standard sketch tools. 1. 4.Process Overview The following steps present an overview for editing revolved features.Editing Revolve Features . In the Browser. In the Revolve dialog box. right-click the feature and click Edit Feature on the shortcut menu. Right-click the feature and click Edit Sketch on the shortcut menu. locate the feature you want to edit. 5. 174 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . click Return to exit the sketch. make the changes required to the sketch.

You use the Project Geometry and Project Cut Edges tools to create different profiles to be revolved. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. All Rights Reserved 175 . Inc. The origin Z axis is projected on the first sketch and changed to a centerline. click Exercise: Creating Revolved Features 2.Exercise: Creating Revolved Features In this exercise. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. you create a simple Indexer part file using the Revolve tool. Indexer Part File Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. click Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features From the table of contents for Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features. From the Main table of contents page.

Create a new part file and using the concepts and techniques learned in this chapter. To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. From the Main table of contents page. create a 3D model of the geometry described below. The completed exercise is shown in the following image.Challenge Exercise: Creating Simple Sketched Features Challenge Exercise: Creating Simple Sketched Features Print Exercise Reference In this exercise. click Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features From the table of contents for Chapter 3: Creating to Simple Sketched Features.ipt. Name your part file Rack-Slide. Rack Slide Dimensions 176 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features . click Challenge Exercise: Creating Simple Sketched Features 2. you create a 3D Rack Slide part using the dimensions and geometry shown below.

How to specify termination options when using the Extrude tool. To use the Sketch tool to create new sketches. The effect of feature relationships on geometry. To create and edit extrude features using the Extrude tool. To create and edit revolve features using the Revolve tool. The effect of feature relationships on geometry when using the Revolve tool. Inc. How to identify consumed and unconsumed sketches.Chapter Summary Summary You learned the following in this chapter: Summary • • • • • • • • • • The concept of creating sketched features and sharing sketches. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. How to create new sketches on existing part faces. All Rights Reserved 177 . Different ways to create reference geometry from existing part edges.

178 Chapter 3: Introduction to Sketched Features .

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • Locating and utilizing the default work planes... Control the appearance of work features. .. Create work planes. Redefining a work axis after you have created it. In this chapter After completing this chapter. • • • • • • Locate and utilize the default work features. Different methods for defining work axes. Redefine work features. Controlling the appearance of work axes.. Create work points. you will be able to. Creating work points. Different methods for defining work points Controlling the appearance of work points. Creating new work planes using several different methods. Controlling the appearance of work planes Editing work planes.Introduction to Work Features Chapter Introduction In this chapter you learn about. Locating and utilizing the default work axes Create work axes. Redefining a work point after you have created it. Locating and utilizing the default work point. Create work axes.

and completing other modeling tasks. placing constraints. display and use the default work planes in part and assembly files How to use the Work Plane tool to create additional work planes Identify examples of work planes Control the visibility of work planes. you will be able to • • • • Locate. In this lesson you learn to create and use work planes.Work Planes Overview Overview Overview Work planes are planes that extend infinitely. Control Valve with Work Planes Objectives After completing this lesson. There are two main types of work planes: default work planes and user-defined work planes. You can use them to assist in creating geometry. 180 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features .

The default work planes extend infinitely from the origin point. the initial sketch is created on one of these default planes.Default Work Planes Every part and assembly file contains default work planes. Default Work Planes Potential Uses for Default Work Planes Following are some potential uses for default work planes: Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. XZ plane. These work planes are located in the Origin folder of the Part/Assembly Browser. All Rights Reserved 181 . The three planes represented are the YZ plane. Inc. Access Methods Use the following method to access the default work planes. You can create additional sketches and/or features using the model or the default work planes. Concept When you create a new part file. There are three default work planes. Browser Expand the Origin folder in the browser. each representing a different coordinate plane. and XY plane.

• • • • Basis for new sketches Basis for assembly constraints Feature termination options Basis for new work features Default Work Plane . All work planes with this option enabled are resized equally. Right-click on the work plane and click Visibility on the shortcut menu to turn on the work plane visibility.Appearance Properties The following options are available to control the appearances of work planes. To prevent the work plane from resizing. The following image represents the work plane size before and after creating geometry. select this option and clear the check mark. • • Visibility: This property is off by default. 182 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . Auto-Resize: This property is on by default and enables the visible size of the work plane to adjust according to the geometry in the current file.

Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Work Plane tool. the work plane will also change. and circular feature changes with the work plane. the work plane is created at a 30 degree angle from part face.The Work Plane Tool You use the Work Plane tool to create work planes in the current part or assembly file. As the angle of the part face changes. the work plane will move to retain the tangent relationship with the cylinder. Procedure In the image below. All Rights Reserved 183 . The circular extrusion is created from the work plane extruding to meet the part face. Work planes are used to define planar surfaces when the existing geometry does not represent the required plane. For example. Work planes are parametrically attached to the model geometry and/or default work planes. and that radius later changes to 5 mm. Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut ] Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. When you create a work plane using features of existing geometry. if the geometry changes. if you create a work plane that is tangent to a cylindrical surface with a radius of 2 mm. the work plane updates to maintain the 30 degree angle.

184 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . For example. you can activate the Repeat Command option. right-click in the graphics window and click Repeat Command on the shortcut menu. Select the second feature or plane. the type of work plane is based completely on the geometry you select.Creating Work Planes When you create work planes. Select the feature or plane. Each selection represents either an orientation or position. All work planes are created based on two or three selections. While the Work Plane tool is active. there is no dialog box to create a planar offset work plane. The following steps represent an example for creating a work plane that is aligned with the Origin XY plane and tangent to the outside of the cylinder. 1.Repeating the Work Plane Tool If you need to create multiple work planes. 2. Process Overview . The Work Plane tool is repeated until you cancel the command.

You can select this option to recreate the work plane using any valid method.The resulting work plane is created. Inc. Any geometry that was based on the work plane being redefined updates to reflect the changes in the work plane. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. the Redefine Feature option is available. All Rights Reserved 185 . Redefining Work Planes As you create work planes. If you right-click the work plane in the browser or graphics window. they appear in the browser just like other parametric features. however they are not edited in the same way as other parametric features.

Examples of Work Planes Several methods are available for creating work planes.Origin Work Plane • Aligned to face/midpoint between two faces Selection 2 .Release the mouse and enter an offset distance Result Selection 1 .Part Face Result Selection 1 . Following are some of the most common methods used to create work planes.Click and drag from plane or surface 186 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features .Cylindrical Surface Result Selection 1 . When you create work planes.Part Face • Offset from plane or surface Selection 2 . you select geometry and/or other work features. Each selection will define either orientation or position for the new work plane. Concept • Aligned to origin plane/tangent to cylindrical surface Selection 2 .

• Angle from face/along an edge Selection 2 . Enter Angle Result Selection 1 . Inc.Vertex on Geometry Selection 3 .Vertext on Geometry Selection 1 .Vertex on Geometry Result Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Part Face • Work plane on 3 points Selection 2 . All Rights Reserved 187 .Planar Surface on Part.

Part Face Result Selection 1 .Part Face Work Plane Appearance The appearance of work planes is controlled in a number of different ways. right-click the work plane and click Visibility on the shortcut menu. Procedure Controlling Global Visibility You can toggle the visibility of work features and sketches by using the options on this menu.• Parallel to face/midpoint of edge Selection 2 . You can control the visibility of the work planes and move and/or resize them. in the browser. View Menu > Object Visibility Individual Work Plane Visibility To control individual work plane visibility. 188 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . Select the appropriate option or use the keyboard shortcuts.

All Rights Reserved 189 . When the move indicator appears. Resizing Work Planes Moving Work Planes Place your cursor over an edge of the work plane. click and drag the corner of the work plane to resize it.Resizing Work Planes Place your cursor over the corner of the work plane. click and drag the work plane to a new location. Moving Work Planes Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. When the resize indicator appears. Inc.

Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. click Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features From the table of contents for Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features. 2. you create a cylindrical control valve using both origin planes and work planes. click Exercise: Work Planes The completed exercise is shown in the following image.Exercise: Work Planes In this exercise. From the Main table of contents page. Control Valve with Work Planes 190 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features .

There are two main types of work axes: default work axes and user-defined work axes. In this lesson you learn to create and use work axes. Simple Part Created Using Work Axes Objectives After completing this lesson. and completing other modeling tasks. placing constraints.Work Axes Overview Overview Overview A work axis is an axis that extends infinitely and is used to assist you in creating geometry. All Rights Reserved 191 . display and use the default work axes in part and assembly files Create additional work axes using the Work Axis tool Identify examples of work axes Control the visibility of work axes Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. you will be able to • • • • Locate.

The three axes represented are the X axis.Default Work Axes Every part and assembly file contains default work axes. Browser Expand the Origin folder and right-click on one of the default work axes. Default Work Axes 192 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . Concept Access Methods Use the following methods to access the default work axes. extend infinitely from the origin point. and Z axis. each representing a different coordinate axis. Y axis. located in the Origin folder of the Part/Assembly Browser. There are three default work axes. These default work axes.

Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Appearance Properties Right-click on an origin axis to access the following options. Right-click on the work axis and click Visibility on the shortcut menu to turn on the work axis visibility. • Visibility: This property is off by default.Potential Uses for Default Work Axes Following are some potential uses for default work axes: • • • • Basis for assembly constraints Axis of revolution for circular pattern Basis for new work features Representation of centerlines on sketches Default Work Axes . All Rights Reserved 193 .

the type of work axis is based completely on the geometry you select. While the Work Axis tool is active. Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut / Repeating the Work Axis Tool If you need to create multiple work axes. the work axis updates to reflect those changes. For example. there is no dialog box to create an axis at the intersection of two planes. When you create a work axis using features of existing geometry. 194 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . you can activate the Repeat Command option. Work axes are used to define an axis when the existing geometry does not represent the required axis. if the geometry changes. Work axes are parametrically attached to the model geometry and/or default work features. The Work Axis tool is repeated until you cancel the command.The Work Axis Tool The Work Axis tool is used to create work axes in the current part or assembly file. The following steps represent some examples for creating a work axis. Process Overview . All work axes are created by selecting existing geometric features or other work features. right-click in the graphics window and click Repeat Command on the shortcut menu. Procedure Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Work Axis tool.Creating Work Axes When you create a work axis.

• Select another Plane or Planar Surface.• Work Axis at Center of Circular Feature: • • Work Axis at Intersection of Two Planes: On the Panel Bar. Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. click the Work Axis tool and select a Plane or Planar Surface. • The work axis is created at the intersection of the two planes. All Rights Reserved 195 .

196 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . If you rightclick on the work axis in the browser or graphics window. Any geometry that was based on the work axis being redefined updates to reflect the changes in the work axis. the Redefine Feature option is available. however they are not edited in the same way as other parametric features. Select this option to recreate the work axis using any valid method.Redefining Work Axis As you create work axes. they appear in the browser just like other parametric features.

Circular Feature Result • Work Axis at Intersection of Two Planes: Selection 2 .Creating Work Axes Several methods are available for creating work axes.Plane or Planar Surface Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Following are some of the most common methods used to create work axes.Example of Work Axes Concept Process Overview . Inc. you select geometry and/or other work features. All Rights Reserved 197 .Plane or Planar Surface Result Selection 1 . When you create work axes. • Work Axis at Center of Circular Feature: Selection 1 .

• Work Axis Through Point/Normal to Plane: Selection 2 .Point or Midpoint Result Selection 1 .Plane or Planar Surface • Work Axis Through Two Points: Selection 2 .Point or Midpoint 198 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features .Point Result Selection 1 .

Work Axis Appearance Procedure Work Axis Appearance You can turn on or off the appearance of work axes individually or globally in the part or assembly file. View Menu > Object Visibility Individual Work Axis Visibility To control individual work axis visibility. in the browser. Select the appropriate option or use the keyboard shortcuts. All Rights Reserved 199 . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. right-click the work axis and click Visibility on the shortcut menu. Controlling Global Visibility You can toggle the visibility of work features and sketches by using the options on this menu.

you use work axes to add features to an existing part. click Exercise: Work Axes The completed exercise is shown in the following image.Exercise: Work Axes In this exercise. You will utilize both origin work axes as well as new work axes to create the additional features required for the part. 2. click Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features From the table of contents for Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features. Simple Part Created Using Work Axes 200 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . From the Main table of contents page. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.

In this lesson you learn how to create and use both grounded and parametric work points.0 coordinate.Work Points Overview Overview Overview Work points are used to represent a single point on the geometry or in space. Inc. PC Speaker Base Component Objectives After completing this lesson. Each part and assembly file contains one center point work point representing the 0. you will be able to • • • • Utilize the Center Point work point when creating geometry Create parametric work points Create grounded work points Identify methods used to create work points Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 201 .0. You can create other work points that are parametrically attached to the geometry or grounded to a location specified.

Center Point Work Point 202 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . Work planes and work axes extend outward from this point. Located under the Origin folder in the Part/Assembly browser.0 coordinate.0. By default. Concept In this lesson you learn how to access and use the Center Point work point in your designs. Isometric View of Origin Axes and Center Point Identifying the Center Point Work Point Expand the Origin folder to expose the origin work features.Center Point Work Point Each part and assembly file contains a Center Point work point. Right-click on the center point and click Visibility on the shortcut menu to display the center point. The Center Point work point appears at the bottom of the list. visibility for the center point is turned off. this point represents the 0.

expand the Origin folder and select the Center Point. you can create your initial sketch geometry relative to its position. click the Project Geometry tool and in the browser. 1. Create a new part file.Initial Use for Center Point Work Point It is recommended that all designs initially reference the Center Point work point by constraints or dimensions. The default sketch is automatically created. On the Panel Bar. All Rights Reserved 203 . Inc. 2. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. The following steps describe how to reference the Center Point work point in your design. Now that the center point is projected onto the sketch.

the sketch geometry stays in the same position relative the origin center point. Next add constraints and/or dimension referencing the center point work point. in the browser. expand the Origin folder and select it. 204 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . Center Point Visibility Note You do not need to turn on the visibility of the center point to reference it in your design features. This insures that when the dimensions change. This technique also positions your geometry relative to the other origin work planes and axes for later use.3. After changing the dimensions on the sketch. the geometry is still centered around the projected center point. To project the center point.

All Rights Reserved 205 . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. right-click in the graphics window and click Repeat Command on the shortcut menu. While the Work Point tool is active. the work point changes accordingly. Several methods are available for creating these work points. Potential Uses for Work Points Following are some potential uses for work points: • • • • Basis for assembly constraints Projection onto sketches Basis for new work features Creation of 3D sketches by drawing lines between work points Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Work Point tool. Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut . Either method creates a work point that is parametrically attached to the geometry or other work features. you can activate the Repeat Command option. The Work Point tool will be repeated until you cancel the command. Repeating the Work Point Tool If you need to create multiple work points. Inc. Procedure Work points are used as construction geometry to assist in the creation of other geometry and features. If this geometry changes.The Work Point Tool You use the Work Point tool to create parametric construction points on part features.

click the Work Point tool and select the of an edge 206 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features .Creating Work Points Several methods are available for creating work points. The work point position is determined by the geometry or other work features that are selected. The following steps represent some examples for creating a work points. • Creating a work point on a vertex The work point is created on the selected vertex On the Panel Bar. click the Work Point tool and select a vertex on the part • Creating a work point the midpoint of an edge The work point is created on the midpoint of the selected edge On the Panel Bar.Process Overview .

they appear in the browser just like other parametric features. If you right-click on the work point in the browser or graphics window.• Creating a work point at the intersection of a edge and plane Select a plane or surface The work point is created at the intersection of the edge and plane On the Panel Bar. however they are not edited in the same way as other parametric features. All Rights Reserved 207 . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Selecting this option enables you to recreate the work point using any valid method. Inc. click the Work Point tool and select an edge or axis Redefining Work Points As you create work points. the Redefine Feature option is available. Any geometry that was based on the work point being redefined updates to reflect the changes in the work point.

3D Move/Rotate Dialog Box 208 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . Grounded work points differ from standard work points in that they are not parametrically attached to the model geometry. you are presented with the 3D Move/Rotate dialog box. you must select existing geometry for the initial placement. however after the initial placement is selected. When you execute the Grounded Work Point tool. grounded work points can be placed anywhere in 3D space. Procedure After the grounded work points position has been set. Unlike standard work points which update their position to reflect changes in model geometry. it appears in the graphics window the same as a standard work point. and can be used in the same way as a standard work point. The interface in the dialog box changes depending on which type of transformation you are doing on the grounded work point. 3D Move/Rotate Dialog Box After you select the initial location for the grounded work point. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Grounded Work Point tool. the work point can be moved and/or rotated in any direction. Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut . grounded work points remain in their set position until manually moved.Grounded Work Points Unlike standard work points which must be placed somewhere on the geometry or at an intersection of geometry and/work features.

1.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating grounded work points. All Rights Reserved 209 . the dialog box changes to enable you to input or drag an angle value. On the Panel Bar. Inc. The work point triad appears at the selected location. To transform the grounded work point. you must select an element of the triad according to the Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. the fields available in the dialog box are based on the triad element selected. click the Grounded Work Point tool and select a vertex or other work point to define the initial position. When you select an axis element on the Triad. 2. Grounded Work Points . When you select a Triad element for a move transformation.The image above describes the transformation options when moving a grounded work point.

3. In this image. Select the Redefine Alignment or Position option to realign the triad. Select the More tab to see additional options. and then the angled edge on the part is selected. The previous steps results in the triad being aligned to the selected edge.transformation desired. the triad Y Axis is selected. 210 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features .

Click Apply or OK to create the work point at the current location. In this image. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. The work point is displayed in the graphics window just like a standard work point. All Rights Reserved 211 . However. 5. Inc. note the slightly different icon for grounded work points in the browser.4. the triad Y axis arrow element is selected enabling you to move the work point along the Y axis by entering a value or clicking and dragging the distance in the graphics window.

This would enable you to move or rotate the grounded work point from the new location. Select the Redefine alignment or position option and select an element of the triad. enabling you to transform the work point from a point other than its current position. The following steps represent an overview for using the 3D Move/Rotate dialog box to transform an existing grounded work point. right-click on the grounded work point and click 3D Move/Rotate on the shortcut menu. you have options to redefine or move/rotate the work point. 2.Process Overview After you create the grounded work point. To move the triad only. In the image below. 212 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features . 1. the triad is being relocated to the center of the part.Moving and Rotating Grounded Work Points . where a standard work point exists. Redefining a work point is the same as redefining other work features. In the browser. in the 3D Move/Rotate dialog box select the More tab and then select the Move Triad Only option.

Inc. Select an axis element on the triad and enter or drag and angle of rotation. Clear the Move Triad Only option and click the Transform tab.3. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Click Apply or OK to position the grounded work point at the current location. All Rights Reserved 213 .

Line or Axis • Work point at the intersection of a plane and a curve: Selection 2 .Plane or Face 214 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features .Curve Result Selection 1 .Additional Examples of Work Points Following are some additional methods for creating work points.Surface Result Selection 1 . Concept • Work point at the intersection of a line or axis and a surface: Selection 2 .

click Exercise: Work Points The completed exercise is shown in the following image. click Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features From the table of contents for Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. you create a PC speaker base component by using sketched features and work points. Inc. the sketch geometry has already been created. All Rights Reserved 215 .Exercise: Work Points In this exercise. 2. PC Speaker Base Component Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. To save time. From the Main table of contents page.

click Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Work Features The completed exercise is shown in the following image. sketched features. From the Main table of contents page. and hole features. 2. To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. click Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features From the table of contents for Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features. You create different types of work features. Offset-Rod-Guide 216 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features .Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Work Features Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Work Features Print Exercise Reference In this exercise you create the Offset-Rod-Guide part by using the concepts and procedures you learned in this chapter.

How to use the default center point work point. How to create new work points. both parametric and grounded. Y How to redefine and control the appearance of work axes in your model. Inc.Chapter Summary Summary You learned the following in this chapter: Summary • • • • • • • • How to locate and utilize the default work planes contained in every part and assembly file. How to redefine and control the appearance of work points in your model. All Rights Reserved 217 . How to control the appearance of work planes in your part and assembly files. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. How to create new work planes using different methods to define them. How to use the default work axes as well as create new work axes.

218 Chapter 4: Introduction to Work Features .

you will be able to.Introduction to Placed Features Chapter Introduction In this chapter you learn about. Setting the draft angle and pull direction. • • Create and edit fillet features. Applying custom color styles to a part model.. • • • • In this chapter After completing this chapter. Creating rectangular and circular patterns of features on your part. Different types of fillets that can be created. Create and edit thread features on your part by using the Thread tool. Apply face drafts to a part model by using the Face Draft tool. Create and edit shell features to remove material from a part. Creating and editing chamfer features. Creating Shell features to remove material from your part model. Create and edit hole and thread features. Adding Face Drafts to a model. Use the three available methods for creating chamfer features. The three different methods for defining chamfer features. Create and edit chamfer features.. Create and use custom color styles on a part model. Representing external and/or internal threads on a part. • • • • • . Using the Hole and Thread tools. Use the options contained in the Shell dialog box. • • • • • • • • • • • Creating and editing Fillet features... Create and edit rectangular and circular patterns. Use the options on each tab of the Fillet dialog box to control how a fillet is created.

however certain situations may call for the use of variable radius fillets. Fillets are commonly used when parts are designed to remove sharp edges and reduce the potential of stress cracking. you will be able to • Use the Fillet tool to create constant and variable radius fillets 220 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . In this lesson you learn how to create both constant and variable radius fillets. They can exist on geometry in various sizes and shapes.Fillet Features Overview Overview Overview Fillet features are among the most widely used features on any three-dimensional (3D) part. Pillar Block with Fillets Objectives After completing this lesson. The most common type of fillet feature is a constant radius fillet. and also for aesthetic purposes.

Edges: Displays the number of edges selected for this edge set. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut SHIFT+F Constant Radius Tab Fillet Dialog Box . Procedure Before and After Fillet Features Access Methods You can use the following methods to access the Fillet tool. All Rights Reserved 221 . You can create both constant radius and variable radius fillets with the Fillet tool.Constant Tab Edge Sets: An edge set consists of selected edges and a radius value. The arrow icon indicates you are in the selection mode and can continue to select the required edges. Inc.The Fillet Tool You use the Fillet tool to create fillets and rounds on existing 3D geometry.

To remove selected edges from the edge set. • Feature: Enables you to select or remove all edges of a feature at once. Click to add: Select this area of the dialog box to create a new edge set. select the appropriate edge set in the dialog box. they are all treated as one fillet feature. then while holding the CTRL or SHIFT key. • Edge: Enables you to select or remove individual edges for the fillet. Select mode area: Determines how edges are selected. 222 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . The pencil icon indicates that the radius value is being edited. Although each edge set can have a different radius value. Each edge set consist of selected edges and a specific radius.Radius: Specify a value for the radius of the fillet for each edge set. You cannot select additional edges until you select the edges field of the edge set. • Loop: Enables you to select or remove the edges of a closed loop on a face. select the edges to be removed.

If some edges have already been selected.All Fillets: Select this option to automatically select all concave edges and corners. You cannot remove individual edges from the All Fillets edge set. You cannot remove individual edges from the All Rounds edge set. Use the Click to Add area for additional edges. All Rights Reserved 223 . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. a new edge set is created for the remaining edges. If some edges are already selected. All Rounds: Select this option to automatically select all convex edges and corners.Variable Tab Edges: Select the edge to place a variable radius fillet. Only one edge is allowed per selection. Variable Radius Tab Fillet Dialog Box . The manually selected edges are not included in the new edge set. The manually selected edges are not included in the new edge set. a new edge set is created for the remaining edges.

For example. Values represent the percentage from the start point. Smooth radius transition: Select this option to gradually blend the radius between points. On Off 224 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . Radius: Enter a radius value for the selected point. Clear this option to create fillets with a linear transition between the points.25 represents a distance 25% of the length of the edge from the start point.Point: List the start point and endpoint of the selected edge. The point selected in the dialog box is highlighted on the edge. . Position: Specify a position along the selected edge for the selected point. Select additional points along the edge for more control over the variable radius.

Setbacks Tab Fillet Dialog Box .Setbacks Tab Vertex: Select the vertex of three selected edges. All Rights Reserved 225 . Edge/Setback: Select each edge and specify a setback value for the edge. When you create fillets on three edges that meet at a vertex. The following images represent the result of using the Setbacks tab. The value specified represents a distance along the selected edge from the vertex. Not Using Setbacks Using Setbacks Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. using the Setbacks tab is optional. Inc.

Fillet Dialog Box . 226 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . the fillet radius varies when necessary to preserve the adjacent faces. Rolling ball where possible: This option sets the corner style for the fillets. the fillet radius remains constant and adjacent edges are extended as required to maintain the radius.Options To access the following options. If this option is not selected.Expanded Roll along sharp edges: This option sets the solution method for the fillet when conditions would cause adjacent edges to be extended in order to maintain the radius. If this option is selected.Fillet Dialog Box . click the [>>] button to expand the Fillet dialog box.

two edge sets have been created. Only the selected edge is calculated during the fillet operation. features that intersect the fillet feature are checked and their intersections are calculated. Feature Intersecting Fillet Creating Constant Radius Fillets . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. An error results when creating the fillet feature. On the Panel Bar. select the edges to be filleted and specify a radius for each edge set. 2. In the image below. all edges tangent to the selected edge are selected automatically. All Rights Reserved 227 . 1. In the following images. Create an edge set for each different radius. the cut feature would intersect the fillet feature. in the graphics window. If this option is not selected. Preserve All Features: When this option is selected. Editing the fillet feature and enabling the Preserve All Features option fixes the problem and the fillet and cut features remain valid. Inc. click the Fillet tool.Automatic Edge Chain: When this option is selected.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating constant radius fillet features. With the Fillet dialog box displayed. The first edge set contains two edges to receive a 2 mm fillet and the second set contains three edges to receive a 1 mm fillet. features that intersect with the fillet are not calculated.

3.

Click OK to create the fillet feature. Note in the browser only one fillet feature appears even though five edges were filleted in this example.

Creating Variable Radius Fillets - Process Overview
The following steps represent an overview for creating variable radius fillet features. 1. 2. On the Panel Bar, click the Fillet tool. With the Fillet dialog box displayed, select the Variable tab, and in the graphics window, select the edge(s) to apply the variable radius fillet. In the Fillet dialog box, click the Start point to modify and in the Radius field enter the radius for the Start point then click the End point to modify the radius End point.

228

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features

3.

To add an additional point along the selected edge, drag the cursor along the selected edge and left click to add the point.

4.

After the additional point(s) is added, in the Radius box specify a radius for the fillet at the selected point and in the Position box specify a position along the edge for the new point.

5.

Click OK to create the fillet.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

229

Editing Fillet Features
After you have created a Fillet feature, you can edit it using the same dialog box. In the browser, right-click the Fillet feature and click Edit Feature on the shortcut menu. The Fillet dialog box is displayed enabling you to change the fillet parameters, add or remove selections, and change options.

230

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features

Exercise: Fillet Features
In this exercise, you create fillet features on the existing Pillar-Block-Rev-2 component. You will create both constant and variable radius fillets.
Print Exercise Reference

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:
1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features, click Exercise: Fillet Features

2.

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Pillar Block with Fillets

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

231

Chamfer Features
Overview Overview

Overview
You can place chamfer features on parts to serve different purposes from functional to aesthetic. Chamfers can exist on parts in various sizes and angles. In this lesson you learn how to create and edit chamfer features.

Rod-Bearing-Mount Complete with Chamfers

Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to • Use the Chamfer tool to create and edit chamfers

232

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features

The Chamfer Tool
You use the Chamfer tool to add chamfer features to edges on your part. These features, like other features, are fully parametric and easily editable after you create them. When you create chamfer features, you can choose from three different methods which determine how the chamfer is specified. With any of the methods, the end result is the replacement of the selected edge(s) with a face(s) at an angle specified either directly or indirectly through the use of distances.
Procedure

Before and After Chamfer Features

Access Methods
Use the following methods to access the Chamfer tool. Panel Bar

Keyboard Shortcut

SHIFT+K

When you use any of the above listed methods to access the Chamfer tool, the following options are available. There are three methods for creating chamfers, Single Distance, Distance/Angle, and Distance/Distance. Each method presents different options in the Chamfer dialog box.

Chamfer Dialog Box - Single Distance Option

Edges: Select the edges to be chamfered

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

233

Distance: Specify a distance for the chamfer. The distance is applied to both sides of the selected edge resulting in a 45-degree chamfer.

Chamfer Dialog Box - Distance/Angle Option

Edges: Select the edge(s) to be chamfered. This option is disabled until you select a face. The edge(s) selected must be adjacent to the selected face. Face: Select a face adjacent to the edge you are chamfering. The angle is measured from this face. Distance: Specify a distance for the chamfer. The distance is measured from the selected edge along the selected face. Angle: Enter an angle for the chamfer. The angle is measured from the selected face.

Chamfer Dialog Box - Distance/Distance Option

Edge: Select the edge to be chamfered. When you use this method, only one edge can be chamfered at a time. Click this button to flip the sides of the selected edge for calculating Distance1 and Distance2. Distance1: Specify the first distance of the chamfer. This distance is measured along one of the adjacent faces. Distance2: Specify the second distance of the chamfer. This distance is measured along the opposite adjacent face.

234

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features

You can expand the Chamfer dialog box by clicking the [>>] button. Expanding the Chamfer dialog box presents the following options.

Chamfer Dialog Box - Expanded Area

Edge Chain: The options control how the edges are selected. The edge selected and all tangentially connected edges. Only the edge selected. Setback: This option is available only when using the single distance method. When chamfering three edges that meet at a corner, this option determines the result of the corner.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

235

Creating and Editing Chamfer Features - Process Overview
The following steps represent an overview for creating and editing chamfer features. 1. 2. On the Panel Bar, click the Chamfer tool. In the Chamfer dialog box, select the desired method to create the chamfer. • For a single distance chamfer, select the edge(s) to be chamfered, enter a distance for the chamfer and click OK.

The resulting chamfer is created

236

Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features

For the Distance/Angle method, select the Distance/Angle option. Select the face, and then select the edge(s) to be chamfered. Enter a distance and angle for the chamfer and click OK.

The resulting chamfer is created

For the Distance/Distance method, select the Distance/Distance option. Select the edge to be chamfered. Enter distance values in the Distance1 and Distance2 fields.

Optionally flip the direction of the chamfer by clicking the Flip Direction icon.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

237

Right-click the feature and click Edit Feature on the shortcut menu. The resulting chamfer is created. 238 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . Editing Chamfer Features After the chamfer feature is created.Click OK to create the chamfer. it will appear in the browser. The Chamfer dialog box is displayed enabling you to edit the feature the same way it was created.

After the features have been created. click Exercise: Chamfer Features 2. Rod-Bearing-Mount Complete with Chamfers Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features. From the Main table of contents page. Inc.Exercise: Chamfer Features In this exercise. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. you will add chamfer features to an existing part. you will edit the chamfer features and view the result. All Rights Reserved 239 .

Hydraulic Valve Component Objectives After completing this lesson. Although Hole features are considered to be placed features. they do require an unconsumed sketch representing the center point locations for the holes. In this lesson you learn how to use the Hole tool to create parametric hole features and how to use the Thread tool to create parametric thread features on existing geometry. you will be able to • • Use the Hole tool to create and edit hole features Use the Hole tool to create internal thread features and use the Thread tool to create external thread features 240 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . You use the Thread tool to place both internal and external thread features on the part.Hole and Thread Features Overview Overview Overview Hole features enable you to create parametric holes on your part.

you are presented with different options for the type of hole being created. Additional options for the drill point and thread options are also available. When you start the Hole tool. rather than having to manually edit or create geometry to achieve the same result. or points projected from other geometry in the part. the Hole tool provides greater flexibility in the variations and types of holes. and countersunk holes. such as counterbore. you must create a sketch containing the hole center points.The Hole Tool You use the Hole tool to create parametric hole features on parts. Procedure When you create holes using the Hole tool. countersink. and threads. You can create center points using the Point/Hole Center sketch tool. counterbored holes. the endpoints of sketched lines. All Rights Reserved 241 . With the Hole tool you can create the various hole types in a single dialog box. Part with Various Types of Holes Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Hole tool. You can create standard drilled holes. Although you can create holes by extruding a circle with a Cut feature relationship. Inc. Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Keyboard Shortcut H Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

Holes Dialog Box . Tapped: This option enables tapped threads in the hole and expands the Hole dialog box. Drill Point: Select either a flat bottom drill or standard tapered drill point. and projected work points.Expanded The Holes dialog box includes the following options and specifications: Centers: Select the center points to use for the hole(s). Other acceptable points include endpoints of lines. Thread Type: From the drop-down list. Click this button to flip the direction of the hole. 242 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . You can also clear hole centers from the selection set by holding the CTRL key and selecting the center points. Through All: This option enables the hole to go all the way through the part. the center points will be selected automatically. and countersink. Termination: Select one of the following Termination types: • • • Distance: This option enables you to specify a depth for the hole in the preview area of the dialog box. To: This option enables you to specify a face or plane to terminate the hole. • Optionally specify an angle other than the standard 118-degree drill point. projected centerpoints of circles and arcs. Type: Click the button representing the desired hole type: drilled. counterbore. If you create the sketch using the Point/Hole Center objects. select the thread type.

select the Class of thread. Diameter: Select the actual diameter used to create the hole. On the Standard toolbar. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Pitch: Creates the hole using the Pitch diameter of the selected thread size. Available pitches are based on the selected Nominal Size. Create a new sketch containing the center point location for the hole features. Inc. select the nominal hole size. Right Hand: Select this option for a right-hand thread. All Rights Reserved 243 . Creating and Editing Holes . Pitch: From the drop-down list.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating and editing holes. select the thread pitch. • • • • Minor: Creates the hole using the Minor Diameter of the selected thread size. If this option is not selected. Tap Drill: Creates the hole using the Tap Drill diameter of the selected thread size. click Return to exit the sketch. Major: Creates the hole using the Major Diameter of the selected thread size. you must specify a thread depth in the preview area of the dialog box. 1. Class: From the drop-down list. 2. Nominal Size: From the drop-down list. Left Hand: Select this option for a left-hand thread.Full Depth: This option creates the threads at the full depth of the hole.

4.3. the hole centers will be automatically selected. 244 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . In some situations it may be easier to draw construction line segments to locate the center points of the holes. On the Panel Bar. Click OK to create the hole(s). click Return to exit the sketch. If you use the Point/Hole Center sketch object. Remember. On the Standard toolbar. Adjust the options in the dialog box depending on the type of hole(s) you need to create. click the Hole tool. the endpoints of lines can be used to locate hole features.

Left-hand versus right-hand threads are also depicted correctly. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. set the Diameter option to Major. Fine threads will appear fine while coarse threads appear coarse. This creates the hole at the major diameter of the thread. Click OK to create the threaded hole. In the image below the endpoints are being selected and the Tapped option is being used. Inc. Note the bitmap representing a threaded hole. The bitmap will change according to the thread specification.5. thus preventing an interference being returned between the fastener and the hole. Preventing Interference Between Holes and Fasteners Tip In the Threads area. Select the Thread type from the drop-down list and adjust the other thread options as required. On the Panel Bar. click the Hole tool and then select the endpoints of the line segments. All Rights Reserved 245 .

Many of the same options available for internal threads using the Hole tool are also available when you use the Thread tool. 246 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . the Thread tool does not require an unconsumed sketch.Thread Features The Thread tool enables you to create thread features on external and internal surfaces. Panel Bar Thread Feature Dialog Box .Location Tab The Location tab in the Thread Feature dialog box includes the following options and specifications: Face: Click the icon to select the face(s) to apply thread features. Threads are considered a placed feature. therefore. All that is required is existing cylindrical surfaces to apply the thread feature. Procedure Example of External Thread Features Access Methods Use the following method to access the Thread tool.

Left Hand: Select this option to generate a left hand thread.Specification Tab The Specification tab in the Thread Feature dialog box includes the following options and specifications: Thread Type: Select the required thread type. the following options become available. Nominal Size: The nominal thread size is automatically selected based upon the diameter of the selected face. Right Hand: Select this option to generate a right hand thread.Display in Model: Select this option to display the thread bitmaps on the model. • Offset: Specifies the distance from the start face of the thread feature. When this option is not selected. • Length: Specifies the length of the thread feature on the selected face. Inc. Pitch: Select the appropriate thread pitch from the drop-down list. Thread Feature Dialog Box . Selecting a nominal size other than the size automatically selected may result in an error when you click OK. All Rights Reserved 247 . If this option is not selected. Click this button to flip the direction of the thread feature. Full Length: Select this option to apply the thread feature to the entire length of the selected face. the thread feature is created but is not displayed on the geometry. Class: Select the appropriate thread class from the drop-down list. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

1.Creating Thread Features . On the Specification tab. Just like other parametric features. The thread feature appears on the model geometry as well as in the browser. 248 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . On the Panel Bar. adjust the Thread Length options as required. you can right-click the thread feature and click Edit Feature on the shortcut menu to edit the feature using the same dialog box used in creating the feature. On the Location tab. select the appropriate thread type and adjust the other settings as required by your design intent. Click OK to create the thread feature. click the Thread tool and select a cylindrical face on the part.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating external thread features using the Thread tool. 2.

From the Main table of contents page. you open the Hyd-Valve-Housing part file and create new hole features. Inc. Hydraulic Valve Component Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. All Rights Reserved 249 . click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features. You then use the Thread tool to add thread features to the component.Exercise: Hole and Thread Features In this exercise. You will use the Hole tool to add the necessary hole features. click Exercise: Hole and Thread Features 2. The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Complete Part Containing Shell Features Objectives After completing this lesson.Shell Features Overview Overview Overview You use shell features to remove material from existing solid features. you will be able to: • Use the Shell tool to create shelled features 250 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . In this lesson you learn how to create and edit shell features. By using shell features. you can create the overall shape of your part and then create a cavity in the part by specifying a wall thickness for the faces.

The Shell Tool You use the Shell tool to create shelled features on existing solid geometry. With the Shell tool. you can remove material from an existing part and create a cavity in the part by specifying a wall thickness for the faces. Generally. Procedure Before and After Shell Feature Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Shell tool. Inc. Panel Bar Shell Dialog Box Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. you select at least one face on the part to be removed from the shell feature leaving the remaining faces as the shell walls. One key advantage to using the Shell tool is that you can create differing wall thickness for each face of the part. All Rights Reserved 251 .

Direction: Click one of the direction buttons. it will result in a cavity in the part with no open faces. In the Thickness box enter a wall thickness. 252 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . The remaining faces serve as walls for the shell feature. Create a part representing the overall shape required. Thickness: Specify value for the wall thickness. Unique face thickness: Select the Click to Add area of the dialog box to create unique face thicknesses for the shell feature. If you do not remove any faces from the shell feature. • Inside: The thickness is applied to the inside of the existing faces.Remove Faces: Click this icon to select the face(s) to remove from the shell feature. • Outside: The thickness is applied to the outside of the existing faces. Select the face(s) and specify a unique wall thickness for the face. 1. • Both: Half of the thickness is applied to each side of the face.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating shell features. This value overrides the default thickness for the selected face(s) only. Creating Shell Features . 2. click the Shell tool and select the faces to remove from the shell operation. On the Panel bar.

To assign unique wall thicknesses. Inc. Under Unique Face Thickness. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 253 . click the [>>] button to expand the dialog box and select the Click to Add area and select the face(s) to assign a unique wall thickness. The shell feature is created. Click OK to create the shell feature.3. specify a thickness for the selected face(s).

Exercise: Shell Features In this exercise. applying a common wall thickness to all faces. You will then edit the shell feature to include unique wall thicknesses on different features. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. Complete Part Containing Shell Features 254 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . click Exercise: Shell Features 2. you will create a shell feature for the part. From the Main table of contents page. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features.

you will be able to • • Create and edit rectangular patterns Create and edit circular patterns Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. If the original feature changes. There are two types of patterns: Rectangular and Circular. Inc. Each type offers different options for creating the pattern. you are creating parametric copies of that feature.Pattern Features Overview Overview Overview Pattern features are used to parametrically duplicate selected features. Completed Face Plate with Patterned Features Objectives After completing this lesson. When you pattern a feature. All Rights Reserved 255 . In this lesson you learn how to create and edit Rectangular and Circular Pattern features. the patterned features update to reflect those changes.

There are several options to control how the feature(s) will be patterned. Procedure When you create these patterns. they are associative to the original feature. Example of Rectangular Patterns Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Rectangular Pattern tool. You can pattern a feature along one or two directions and/or paths. Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut SHIFT+R 256 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . so any changes in the original feature are reflected in the pattern occurrences.The Rectangular Pattern Tool You use the Rectangular Pattern tool to duplicate one or more features in a rectangular pattern. with options to control feature spacing.

Enter a value for the pattern distance. Direction 1: Path: Select the path for Direction 1. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Start: Sets the start point for the first occurrence. Direction 2: This column is optional and contains the same options as Direction 1. All Rights Reserved 257 . Enter the number of occurrences for the pattern. This can be the edge of a part or a 2D sketch representing the path for the pattern.Expanded The Rectangular Pattern dialog box includes the following options and specifications: Features: Select the feature(s) to be patterned. This number includes the original feature. Curve Length: Disables the Distance field and divides the curve length by the number of occurrences. Use the Flip Direction button to flip the path direction.Rectangular Pattern Dialog Box . Distance: Distance value represents the total pattern distance. Pattern can start at any selected point. Inc. Select one of the following options from the drop-down list: Spacing: Distance value represents the spacing between each occurrence. This value represents either total distance of the pattern or spacing between each feature.

Adjust to Model: This method enables each occurrence termination to be calculated. you will find any sketches used as a path. the way they appear in the browser is unique compared to other features. Finally you will see an Occurrence item for each occurrence in the pattern. Right-click on an occurrence and click Suppress on the shortcut menu to suppress the selected occurrence. Located under the pattern feature. you immediately see the difference. Identical: Occurrence orientation is identical to the first feature. This option is not available on the first occurrence. along with a folder containing the features used in the pattern. each occurrence uses an identical termination method regardless of where they intersect other features. This method requires more processing and can increase computational time on large patterns. Orientation Method: These options control the orientation of the patterned features.Termination Method: Identical: This is the default method which provides the best performance for large patterns. 258 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . Using this method. Browser Appearance of Rectangular/Circular Patterns When you create patterns. If you expand a rectangular or circular pattern. Adjust to Direction 1 or Direction 2: Occurrences will be rotated as the path changes directions. The first Occurrence represents the initial feature used in the pattern followed by the number of occurrences created.

Inc. click the Rectangular Pattern tool and select the feature(s) to be patterned. Optionally include information for Direction 2 and click OK.Process Overview The following steps can be used to create a rectangular pattern. part edge. and spacing options as required and click OK. Click the Path button under Direction 1 and select a path. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Adjust the number of occurrence. Enter the number of occurrences and distance values and adjust the Spacing method accordingly. All Rights Reserved 259 . On the Panel Bar.Creating Rectangular Patterns . Create a part with a feature(s) to be patterned. 1. click the Rectangular Pattern tool and select the feature to be patterned. Optionally provide information for Direction 2. create a 2D sketch containing the path for the pattern. 4. 3. or origin axis for the pattern. On the Panel Bar. 2. To create a pattern along a path. Click the Path button under Direction 1 and select the path for the pattern. distance.

Next you set the pattern properties such as number of occurrences and angle. they are associative to the original feature. There are also options for controlling the creation method and positioning method. Example of a Circular Pattern Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Circular Pattern tool. You then select a rotation axis which serves as the center of the pattern. you must first select a feature to pattern. so any changes in the original feature are reflected in the pattern occurrences.The Circular Pattern Tool You use the Circular Pattern tool to duplicate one or more features in a circular pattern. Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut SHIFT+O 260 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . Procedure When you start the Circular Pattern tool. When you create these patterns.

work axes. This number includes the original feature. : Flips the rotational direction of the pattern. Positioning Method: Incremental: Sets the angle value to represent the angle between occurrences. Inc. This method requires more processing and can increase computational time on large patterns. Creation Method: Identical: This the default method which provides the best performance for large patterns. : Specify the angle for the pattern. Rotation Axis: Select the rotation axis for the pattern. The result of this angle is based on the Positioning Method chosen. Placement: : Specify the number of occurrences for the pattern.Expanded The Circular Pattern dialog box includes the following options and specifications: Features: Select the feature(s) to be patterned.Circular Pattern Dialog Box . Fitted: Sets the angle value to represent the total rotational angle of the pattern. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. or part edges. Using this method. each occurrence uses an identical termination method regardless of where they intersect other features. Valid selections include circular faces. Adjust to Model: This method enables each occurrence termination to be calculated. All Rights Reserved 261 .

Located under the pattern feature. the way they appear in the browser is unique compared to other features. If you expand a rectangular or circular pattern.Browser Appearance of Rectangular/Circular Patterns When you create patterns. The first Occurrence represents the initial feature used in the pattern followed by the number of occurrences created. you immediately see the difference. 262 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . you will find any sketches used as a path. Right-click on an occurrence and click Suppress on the shortcut menu to suppress the selected occurrence. Finally you will see an Occurrence item for each occurrence in the pattern. This option is not available on the first occurrence. along with a folder containing the features used in the pattern.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Create a part containing the feature(s) to be patterned. Then click the Rotation Axis icon and select the feature representing the rotation axis for the pattern. 3. Optionally click the [>>] button to expand the dialog box and adjust the options as required. 2. 1.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating circular patterns. Click OK to create the pattern. Inc. All Rights Reserved 263 . click the Circular Pattern tool and select the feature(s) to be patterned. On the Panel Bar.Creating Circular Patterns .

click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. you open a face plate component and create both rectangular and patterned features. From the Main table of contents page.Exercise: Pattern Features In this exercise. Completed Face Plate with Patterned Features 264 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . click Exercise: Pattern Features 2. You then edit the patterned features to suppress occurrences within each. The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Inc. In this lesson you learn how to apply draft angles to faces using the Face Draft tool. you might apply the draft angle to all faces. or to single selected faces. you need to apply draft angles to the faces to allow for the part to be pulled from the mold. All Rights Reserved 265 .Face Drafts Overview Overview Overview When you create designs for casting or molds. Depending on the design and manufacturing intent. This draft angle is referred to as a face draft. you will be able to • Use the Face Draft tool to create and edit face drafts Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Indexer Component with Face Drafts Objectives After completing this lesson.

When you create a face draft feature. Note Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Face Draft tool.The Face Draft Tool You use the Face Draft tool to apply draft angles to selected faces on the part. Before and After Face Draft Feature Face Draft Angles In reality. After you define the Pull Direction. the draft angles in this lesson may be exaggerated. you can also choose between a Fixed Edge face draft or Fixed Plane face draft. A draft angle applied to faces on the part allows the part to be pulled away from the mold. Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut SHIFT+D 266 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . or origin plane or axis. you select the faces to apply the draft angle. In this lesson you learn how to create face drafts using each of these methods. you must specify the Pull Direction. For visual clarity. which can be based on a face. The result of the draft angle depends on the orientation of the face in relation to the Pull Direction. Procedure When you create the face draft feature. draft angles are generally very small. edge.

edge.The Face Draft dialog box includes the following options and specifications: Fixed Edge Method: This method creates a face draft on the selected face(s) and the selected edge remains fixed in place. All Rights Reserved 267 . Depending on the position of the selected plane this method causes material to be added on one side of the plane and subtracted from the opposite side of the plane. plane. you can use the Flip Direction button to flip the Pull Direction. be certain to select the edge you want to remain fixed. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Pull Direction: Select a face. or axis to define the direction the part is pulled away from the mold. Inc. use the CTRL or SHIFT key and reselect the edge to remove it from the selection set. Note: If you select an incorrect edge. Fixed Plane Method: This method creates a face draft calculated from the location of the selected plane. Faces: Select the faces to apply the face draft feature. After you make the selection. The Pull Direction is normal to the selected plane. If using the Fixed Edge method. Draft Angle: Specify an angle value for the face draft.

If you are using the Fixed Edge method. Click OK to create the face draft. The face drafts are applied to the selected faces. edge.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating face drafts. select the face at a point closest to the fixed edge. enter an angle value. 268 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features . Create a new part containing the features requiring face drafts. 3. 2. or axis to define the Pull Direction. plane. click the Face Draft tool.Creating Face Drafts . 1. select the Fixed Edge or Fixed Plane method and then select a face. In the Face Draft dialog box. Select the faces to apply the face draft. In the Draft Angle box. On the Panel Bar.

Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. you create and edit face drafts on the part. From the Main table of contents page. Inc. Indexer Component with Face Drafts Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. click Exercise: Face Drafts 2.Exercise: Face Drafts In this exercise. All Rights Reserved 269 . click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. You will experiment with both the Fixed Edge method and Fixed Plane method for creating the face draft.

Assigning a New Color Style Objectives After completing this lesson. a default color style is assigned. you will be able to • Change and assign color styles to parts 270 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features .Creating and Using Color Styles Overview Overview Overview As you create new parts using Autodesk Inventor. In this lesson you learn how to create and assign color styles to parts. You can assign different colors to parts and even create new custom color styles.

they are assigned the Default color style. You can copy these custom color styles to templates or other part files by using the Organizer tool. Specular. Procedure Color styles are stored within each part or assembly file. which is located on the Format pull-down menu. Use the following methods to create and apply color styles. the color style name will appear here.Creating and Using Color Styles When you create new parts. Emissive. Other color styles are available and can be accessed from the Style drop-down list on the Standard toolbar. Pull-Down Menu To Assign Colors . Inc. When selecting a material from the list. it is available only in the part or assembly in which it was created. All Rights Reserved 271 . Diffuse. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. is four color properties. If you create a new color style. Appearance: Use the sliders to adjust the Shiny and Opaque color properties. Select the color swatch next to each properties and select a color from the Custom Color dialog box. Save: Click to save the changes to the selected color style. and Ambient. Color Tab: Located on this tab. The list will update to reflect the closest match.Standard Toolbar Format > Colors Color Dialog Box Style Name: Enter a color style name.

Texture Tab Choose: Click to display the Texture Chooser dialog box. Apply: Click to apply the changes to the color style. Texture Chooser Dialog Box Select a texture by dragging the slider in the preview window. Colors Dialog Box . and leave the dialog box open. Texture Library: • • Application Library: Select this option to display textures from the Application library. Remove: Click to remove the selected texture from the color style. %Scale: Adjust the slider to scale the texture map. Close: Click to close the dialog box.Delete: Click to delete the selected color style. Project Library: Select this option to display textures stored within the current project. New: Click to create a new color style. Rotation: Adjust the slider to rotate the texture map. 272 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features .

Exercise: Creating and Using Color Styles In this exercise. you will create a new color style and apply it to your part. click Exercise: Creating and Using Color Styles 2. All Rights Reserved 273 . Assigning a New Color Style Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features. From the Main table of contents page. Inc. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

click Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Placed Features 2. From the Main table of contents page. The handle is a two piece design for which you are creating one half of the handle. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. click Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features From the table of contents for Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features. To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Placed Features Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Placed Features Print Exercise Reference In this exercise you will utilize the procedures and concepts learned in this lesson to create a plastic handle. Plastic Handle 274 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features .

How to edit a pattern and suppress feature occurrences in the pattern if required. Three methods available for creating chamfers and how to use each method. How to add thread features to a model. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. How to create and edit Hole and Thread features on a part model. How to create and use custom color styles on a part model. Why face drafts are typically used and how these manufacturing methods correlate to options in the dialog box such as Pull-Direction. How to remove material from your part by using the Shell tool. All Rights Reserved 275 . Inc. How to use the options in the Shell dialog box and how they effect the shell feature. The different options available in the Holes dialog box and how to use these options to create different types of holes. How to use the Face Draft tool to apply draft angles to selected faces on a part model.Chapter Summary Summary You learned the following in this chapter: Summary • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • How to create and edit fillet features on a part file. How to use the options on each tab of the Fillet dialog box to control how a fillet feature is created. How to create a custom color style that includes a texture map. How to create and edit rectangular and circular patterns on a part model. The options available for each type of pattern and the effect of these options on the pattern features. How to adjust options in the Colors dialog box to effect the appearance properties of a new color style.

276 Chapter 5: Introduction to Placed Features .

The Assembly Browser.. and Middle Out assembly techniques Use the browser to control different aspects of the assembly environment Activate components inplace within the assembly.. Assembly based work features Using geometry projected from other parts in the assembly to help create new parts. Locating components in and out of the assembly by using different versions of the Find tool. Controlling the appearance of parts and features in the browser and using Design Views to save assembly views. In this chapter After completing this chapter.Assembly Modeling Fundamentals Overview Overview Chapter Introduction In this chapter you learn about. Top Down. Dragging components into the assembly and replacing components in the assembly. Degrees of freedom Simulating motion in an assembly Placing assembly constraints. resequence and reorder the assembly and use browser filters Create Design Views to save assembly views with specific display related characteristics Place components in an assembly using the Place Component tool Drag components into an assembly Replace existing components in an assembly Create new components in the context of the assembly Place assembly constraints Create basic adaptive features for parts used in an assembly • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • .. Creating components in the context of the assembly. • • • The assembly modeling environment and interface used to create assembly models. • Apply Bottom Up. The Place Component tool. you will be able to. Adaptivity and how it can be used in the assembly.. Analyzing components of an assembly.

In this lesson. place existing parts and/or assemblies.Introduction to Assembly Modeling Overview Using Assembly modeling you bring individual components into a common environment and use various tools to assemble them. Completed Assembly Objectives After completing this lesson. you will learn the concept of assembly modeling and the tools you use to create an assembly. and manage the relationships between the parts in the assembly. You create new geometry. you will be able to • • • Understand the concept of assembly modeling and the procedures you use to create an assembly model Navigate the assembly environment and identify the assembly coordinate system Use the Assembly Panel Bar 278 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .

Concept These relationships can range from simple constraint based relationships that determine a components position in the assembly. Typical Assembly Model Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Parametric relationships are created between each component that determine component behavior in the assembly. which enables a component to change size based upon its relationship to other components in the assembly. Inc. to advanced relationships such as adaptivity.Assembly Modeling Concepts You create an assembly by combining multiple components and/or assemblies into a single environment. All Rights Reserved 279 .

• Top Down Assembly Modeling: All assembly components are designed in the context of the assembly. As you design each component. and are making changes to parts based upon their relationships to other components in the assembly. You create and edit all geometry while working in the overall assembly. you are applying the required assembly constraints. The image below represents a Top-Down approach to assembly modeling. The initial part is created. then while working in the context of the assembly. 280 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . additional parts are created.Assembly Modeling Methods Before you create assembly models you must understand the three basic methods you use to create them and how to choose the correct assembly modeling approach. You create a blank assembly. then design each component while still in the assembly environment.

Inc.• Bottom Up Assembly Modeling: Individual components for an assembly are designed outside of the assembly where they will be placed. they are placed into the assembly. After you create the parts they are placed into the assembly and constrained to other parts. Each part file is designed separate from the assembly and other parts. they are made outside of the assembly and will automatically be reflected in the assembly model. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 281 . The image below represents a typical Bottom-Up approach to assembly modeling. Each part is designed separate from the assembly and other components. If changes to the parts are required. After the components are designed.

The image below represents a Middle Out approach to assembly modeling. You can use all of the methods above and switch between them at anytime. As you become more proficient with the application. you will be able to choose the best approach for a given task. For example. as soon as you insert the standard off-the-shelf components. bolts. a typical assembly would generally consist of components that are designed specifically for the assembly.• Middle Out Assembly Modeling: This flexible approach closely represents the actual real-world design process. you have essentially switched to Middle Out approach because you have included parts in the assembly that were created outside of the assembly. Some components are being placed in the assembly. You can begin the assembly using one method and change to a different one. and other standard off-the-shelf components such as nuts. So even if you design all of the non-standard components using a Top-Down approach. or other standard hardware. and understand the benefits to each modeling approach. 282 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . while others are being designed in the context of the assembly.

There are four basic assembly constraints. you use 3D constraints in an assembly to position parts in relation to other parts. or axis. Applied by selecting a circular edge on each part. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. edges. or axes. or pins. One of the selected faces must be circular. Inc. This constraint effectively combines a mate axis/axis and a mate face/face constraint. edges. All Rights Reserved 283 . Generally applied to circular faces and planar faces. each with unique solutions and options. Mate/Flush Constraint: Used to align part features such as faces. Each of these constraint types will be described in greater detail later in this chapter. or any part that needs to be inserted into a hole on another part. Applied to faces. Insert Constraint: Used to insert one component into another. Angle Constraint: Used to specify an angle between two parts. Generally applied to bolts.Assembly Constraints You use Assembly constraints to create parametric relationships between parts in the assembly. Just as you use 2D constraints to control 2D geometry. Tangent Constraint: Used to define a tangential relationship between two parts.

You must edit constraints within the assembly where they were created.Subassemblies You use Subassemblies to organize large assemblies into smaller groups. you create an assembly which was designed to accommodate several different electric motors. 284 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Components within the subassembly are constrained to each other. unaffected by the feature. To do so you activate the subassembly by double-clicking on the subassembly in the browser. The features however are not stored within the parts that are affected but are local to the current assembly and only effect the parts in the context of the current assembly. thus leaving the parts that are common to all assemblies. In the context of the overall assembly. the subassembly behaves as a single part. Each motor type requires a different hole pattern and other cutouts for routing the wiring harness. and chamfers on parts in the assembly. while the subassembly is constrained to the overall assembly as a single component. Assembly based sketches serve as the basis for assembly features. You can use these features in situations where assemblies share common parts but with features that are unique to the assembly. extrusions. For example. Assembly Sketching You use Assembly sketching to create assembly based features such as holes. The use of assembly features would enable you to create these motor-specific features at the assembly level. A subassembly is essentially an assembly placed into another assembly.

and not created from scratch in the context of the assembly. Note: This only applies if the first part in the assembly is placed into. and center point.0. Expand the components to expose the assembly constraints that have been applied. Principle Assembly Modeling Environment Assembly Panel Bar: Contains tools specific to assembly modeling.Assembly Environment The assembly environment in Autodesk Inventor software is virtually the same as the part modeling environment with the exception of tools that are unique to assembly modeling. When a part is activated for editing. Assembly Browser: Lists all parts and their constraints. Expand the Origin folder to expose the origin planes. Inc. 3D Indicator: Displays the current view orientation relative to the assembly coordinate system. Assembly Coordinate System Each assembly file contains an independent coordinate system. All Rights Reserved 285 . Default coordinate system elements are aligned with the 0. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Assembly Coordinate Elements: Identical to the part environment. axes. When you place the first part into the assembly. each assembly also contains an independent coordinate system. Assembly Components: Each component in the assembly is listed. the browser functions are identical to the part modeling environment. the origin point of the part file will be matched to the origin point of the assembly file.0 point in the assembly and can be used as you build the assembly.

By setting the Panel Bar to expert mode. and Sketch modes depending on the context you are using. select the Assembly Panel drop-down. At the top of the panel bar.Assembly Panel Bar Similar to the Part Modeling Panel Bar. As you create your assembly model. the Panel Bar will automatically switch between Assembly. Enter these key sequences to start the related tool. you will make more room available for the Assembly/Part browser. then select Expert. the Assembly Panel Bar contains the tools specific to assembly modeling. Procedure Note the keyboard shortcuts next to each icon. Part. 286 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . you can switch the panel bar to expert mode. Assembly Panel Bar After you become familiar with the assembly tool icons.

Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. click Exercise: Introduction to Assembly Modeling 2.Exercise: Introduction to Assembly Modeling In this exercise. click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals. All Rights Reserved 287 . Completed Assembly Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. you will create a basic assembly model using some of the concepts mentioned in this lesson. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. From the Main table of contents page. Some techniques performed during this lesson will be covered in greater detail later in this chapter.

you will be able to • • • • • • • Activate and edit parts in the context of the assembly Control the visibility of parts in an assembly Resequence and Restructure an assembly Create browser filters and utilize them in an assembly Enable and disable components in an assembly Identify grounded components in an assembly and how they effect other assembly components Create and use Design Views 288 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .Assembly Browser Overview Overview Overview The Assembly Browser offers several options for working in the assembly environment and is your primary tool for interacting with the assembly components and features. 5-Axis Robot Assembly Objectives After completing this lesson. In this lesson you will learn about the various options available through the Assembly Browser.

In-Place Activation In-Place Activation means you activate a part in the context of the assembly. This option will open the part in a separate window. double-click on the part. In the Browser or graphics window.Shortcut Menu Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. Procedure • • • In the Browser or graphics window. Any changes to the part are automatically reflected in the assembly. In-Place Activation . you must activate the part. All Rights Reserved 289 . right-click on the part and on the shortcut menu click Edit. In order to edit a part in the context of the assembly. In the Browser or graphics window. There are a few options available for activating a part in-place. right-click on the part and on the shortcut menu click Open.

the background behind all other parts is greyed. The Panel Bar switches to display the modeling tools. the assembly environment changes. the non-active parts are dimmed. the part is automatically expanded to expose the part features.Active Part and Active Part in the Context of the Assembly 290 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . In the Browser. Assembly Browser .Result of In-Place Activation When a part is activated in the context of the assembly. In the graphics window. • • • • In the Browser.

All Rights Reserved 291 . Browser Part Visibility Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Check mark indicates the part is currently visible. parts with the visibility property turned off appear grey. Procedure Browser Appearance In the Assembly browser. in the Assembly Browser or graphics window. While you work in the context of the assembly. Inc. right-click on an element in the assembly and select Visibility on the shortcut menu.Visibility Control It is possible to control the visibility of all elements in the assembly.

By restructuring the assembly you are creating subassemblies and placing existing parts into the subassembly. Shortcut Menu In the browser or graphics window. Procedure Access Methods The following methods are available for restructuring your assembly.Assembly Resequence It is possible to resequence the order of parts in the assembly. in the browser. Assembly Resequencing Assembly Restructure As you create your assembly. select one or more parts then right-click on a part and select Demote Keyboard Shortcut Select one or more parts and press TAB 292 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . at some point you may need to organize the assembly by placing components into subassemblies. Procedure To resequence the assembly. Parts are displayed in the browser in the order in which they are placed or created. click and drag on the part and release the mouse at its new position. Resequencing the assembly enables you to place the parts in a more logical order.

When you restructure an assembly using the Demote tool. at the same time. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. To restructure all parts in one step. there is a potential that you will loose some assembly constraints during the restructuring process. All Rights Reserved 293 . New File Location: Enter or browse the location for the new subassembly. Assembly Restructure Constraint Warning Assembly Restructure Constraint Warning Dialog Box When restructuring parts into subassemblies. Template: Select a template to use for the new subassembly. Constraints applied to parts residing in the same assembly will be maintained if they are restructured into a new subassembly at the same time. select all the parts in the browser or graphics window and then select the Demote tool. If you restructure the parts separately you will loose the assembly constraints and will need to recreate them. Create In-Place Dialog Box New File Name: Enter a file name for the subassembly. you should restructure all parts to be included in the subassembly. This will place all selected parts into the new subassembly and maintain the constraints. the Create In-Place Component dialog box appears. When possible. Inc. Constraints applied to parts residing in different assemblies and subassemblies will not be maintained.

It is also possible to drag and drop parts from the subassembly to the top level assembly. you may loose assembly constraints using this method. Depending on the constraint conditions. Drag and Drop Restructuring 294 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . it is possible to restructure the assembly by dragging parts from the top level assembly to the subassembly.Drag and Drop Restructuring If a subassembly already exists.

Hide Warnings: Hides warning symbols attached to constraints in the browser. Hides parts contained within a subassembly when the top-level assembly is active. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Procedure Hide Work Features: Hides all work features including the Origin folders. As your assembly grows in complexity. the browser filters can assist you by streamlining its information. Hide Notes: Hides all notes attached to features. Inc.Browser Filters You can filter the display of information in the browser by using the browser filters. All Rights Reserved 295 . Show Children Only: Displays only first level children. At the top of the Assembly Browser. click the Filter button and the filter menu is displayed. Hide Documents: Hides inserted documents.

The Modeling View will display the parts and their features. 296 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . It displays the parts and assembly constraints. note also the Constraints folder at the top. note the appearance of the assembly constraints while in the Position View and the part features while in Modeling View. Procedure Assembly Browser Display Modes When you examine the images above.Browser Display Mode When you work in an assembly the Assembly browser display mode defaults to Position View. This mode enables you to identify part features and activate them for editing without having to activate the part. Expand this folder to expose the assembly constraints. While in the Modeling View. You can change the display mode to Modeling View by selecting the Position Mode drop-down menu at the top of the browser.

the data structure of enabled components is available while components that are not enabled. right-click on the part and on the shortcut menu. only the graphics information is loaded. When a component is not enabled. A check mark indicates the part is currently enabled. Concept When you open an assembly. For large assemblies this is beneficial to increasing overall system performance. when you place components into an assembly. Inc. they are enabled. Assembly with Component Not Enabled In the browser or graphics window. it appears dimmed in the graphics window and its icon color in the browser changes to green. All Rights Reserved 297 . click Enabled. When a component is enabled you have access to the component for editing and applying constraints. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Enabled Components By default.

the first part in each assembly is grounded. right-click on the part and on the shortcut menu. Concept Although the first part is grounded. All degrees of freedom are removed from the component and it cannot be moved. Grounded Components in Browser 298 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . You can also remove the grounded property from the first part in the assembly. while others will move relative to the parts to which they have been constrained. Grounded components appear in the browser with the Push Pin icon. there is no limit to the number of grounded parts that you can have in an assembly. the non-grounded component will move to validate the constraint while the grounded component remains fixed in its position. In the browser or graphics window. When you apply constraints to a grounded component.Grounded Components By default. click Grounded. When you ground parts you can use them to mimic real-world situation where some parts are fixed in position.

you may need to turn the visibility off of several components to work on parts internally. If you save the display configuration as a new design view. Procedure Several different properties are stored within the design view. By default there will be three design views created.idv extension The following properties are stored within design view. You can also use Design views as the basis for Drawing and Presentation views. • • • system. Design Views are stored in the same directory as the assembly and by default have the same name as the assembly with an *.all visible: Built-in design view that when activated will turn the visibility of all components on. Inc. All Rights Reserved 299 . you can recall that configuration by activating the design view. Design Views are used to store assembly display configurations that you can recall the next time you work on the assembly. Browser Menu Area Pull Down Menu View > Design Views Each Design View file can contain multiple design views. system. • • • • • • Component visibility (visible or not visible) Sketch and work feature visibility Component enabled status Color and style properties applied in the assembly Zoom and viewing angle Browser display mode (Position or Modeling) Access Methods The following methods are available for accessing Design Views. UserName.Design Views When you create a new assembly file. as you work on an assembly. For example.default: This design view is automatically created and is based Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.nothing visible: Built-in design view that when activated will turn the visibility of all components off. a separate Design View file is automatically created.

Apply: Click to activate the selected design view.upon your system user name. Design View: Lists the name of the currently selected design view. Save: Click to save the current display configuration as a design view. Delete: Click to delete the selected design view. New: Click to create a new design view file. Design Views Dialog Box Storage Location: Represents the current storage location for the design view file. 300 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Browse: Click to browse for a design view file. Enter a new design view name.

5-Axis Robot Assembly Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. click Exercise: Assembly Browser 2. All Rights Reserved 301 . Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals. you will open an assembly file and use the Assembly Browser to perform several tasks.Exercise: Assembly Browser In this exercise. Inc. From the Main table of contents page.

Placing Components in an Assembly Overview Overview Overview As you create assemblies you place component geometry that represents the assembly's individual parts. In this lesson you will learn about several different ways you can place components into an assembly. Completed Robot Assembly Objectives After completing this lesson. you will be able to • • • • Use the Place Component tool to place parts into an assembly Utilize sources other than Autodesk Inventor software to place components Drag components into an assembly Replace components in an assembly 302 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .

right-click in the graphics window and click Done on the shortcut menu. The same options for opening files are available.0) and will be grounded. Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Keyboard Shortcut P Open Dialog Box Select the file to place into the assembly and click Open. Select this tool and the Open dialog box will be displayed. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Place Component tool. You can place additional occurrences of the part by clicking different locations in the graphics window. Procedure The first component you place into the assembly will be automatically placed at the assembly's origin point (0. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. All Rights Reserved 303 . however the end result is the selected file will be placed into the assembly file instead of opened for editing.The Place Component Tool You use the Place Component tool to place components into the assembly. After you place the part into the assembly. To place files other than Autodesk Inventor software files. select the file type in the Files of type drop-down list.0.

On the Panel Bar. click the Place Component tool and continue to place components into the assembly.Placing Components . 304 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . click the Place Component tool. On the Panel Bar. 1. and click Open. 3. select the file you want to place into the assembly. The first component in the assembly is positioned automatically and is grounded. In the Open dialog box. 5. 4. Optionally place additional components by clicking other locations in the graphics window. 2. Open or create a new assembly file. or press ESC to cancel.Process Overview The following steps are an overview for using the Place Component tool to place components into the assembly.

ige. Some formats will be converted to Autodesk Inventor files when placed into an assembly.iam) Autodesk Mechanical Desktop (*. *. Supported Formats Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.iges) STEP files (*.prt.dwg) AutoCAD (*. (*. *.dwg) SAT files (*. All Rights Reserved 305 .stp. *.igs. *. select the Files of type drop-down list to display the supported file types. Any changes in the Autodesk Mechanical Desktop file. Supported File Types In the Open dialog box. Inc. *.asm) Different capabilities are available with each of these formats.sat) (ACIS/ShapeManager) IGES files (*. would be reflected in the assembly.ste. The following list represents the supported formats that you can place into an assembly.step) Pro Engineer (*.Sources of Placed Components As you use Autodesk Inventor software to build assemblies you can use geometry from other applications as parts in your assembly. Concept • • • • • • • Autodesk Inventor parts and assemblies. *. but others such as Autodesk Mechanical Desktop will be linked to the assembly.ipt.

Right-click on the part and then select Open to open the part in Autodesk Mechanical Desktop. 306 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Changes to the part would be reflected in the assembly.Mechanical Desktop Parts in an Autodesk Inventor Assembly The image above represents an Autodesk Mechanical Desktop part used in an Autodesk Inventor assembly.

Inc. a component is being dragged into the assembly from a Windows Explorer window. the active part file. Procedure In the image below.ipt is being dragged into the nonactive but open assembly. All Rights Reserved 307 . Dragging an Open Part File into an Assembly In the image below. robo_hand.Dragging Components into an Assembly You can drag components into an assembly from other open part files or from Windows Explorer. Dragging Components from Windows Explorer Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. This results in the component being placed into the assembly just as if you had used the Place Component tool.

If not. The message means that the current location is not referenced in the Project file. you must edit the Project paths before re-opening the assembly to include component location or move the component to a location identified within the current project. As a result Autodesk Inventor may not be able to locate the file the next time the assembly is opened. make certain the location of the component is referenced in the current Project file. If you place the component in the assembly. the following message will appear. 308 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .When you drag components from a Windows Explorer window. Click OK to place the component in the assembly.

For example when you start the assembly. or click Cancel to cancel the operation. but the result depends largely on the differences in geometry between the existing component and the replacement component. you may need to replace components. All Rights Reserved 309 . Inc. Procedure When you replace components in an assembly.Replacing Components As you build assemblies. you may not have access to all the required parts. Click OK to continue and replace the selected component. The origin of the new component is coincident with the origin of the component being replaced.Replaces all occurrences of the selected component. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. you can use the Replace tool to replace the proxy part with the final version. some assembly constraints will be lost and need to be recreated. the new version is placed in the same location as the existing version. In the meantime you place a proxy part in place of the final part. There are two versions of the Replace component tool: . . Autodesk Inventor software will attempt to retain the constraints. Access Methods The following methods are available for access the Replace component tool.Replaces only the selected component. Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut CTRL+H > Replace SHIFT+H > Replace All Possible Constraint Loss Dialog Box When you replace components in an assembly the Possible Constraint Loss dialog box will appear. When the component is replaced. After you receive the required geometry.

click the Replace component tool and in the Open dialog box. If the Possible Constraint Loss dialog box appears. double-click on the replacement component.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for replacing components. On the Panel Bar. select the component to be replaced. 1. In the browser or graphics window. 2. 310 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . click OK to replace the component.Replacing Components .

5. double-click on the replacement component. To replace multiple occurrences of the same part. click the Replace All tool.3. 6. All occurrences of the selected component are replaced. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. select one of the occurrences and on the Panel Bar. Inc. In the Open dialog box. All Rights Reserved 311 . Click OK in the Possible Constraint Loss dialog box. 4.

After you place the components. click Exercise: Placing Components in an Assembly 2. you will use the Replace Component tool to replace components in the assembly. click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals. From the Main table of contents page. you use the techniques covered in this lesson to place components into a new assembly. The completed exercise is shown in the following image.Exercise: Placing Components in an Assembly In this exercise. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. Completed Robot Assembly 312 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .

Components Created In-Place Objectives After completing this lesson. you will be able to • • • • Create parts in the context of the assembly Use work features in assemblies Use 2D sketches in an assembly Use projected edges and features Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. This technique enables you to take advantage of other part features in the assembly to create new geometry and validate this new geometry based upon the design intent.Creating Components in an Assembly Overview Overview Overview Creating components in an assembly enables you to design parts in the context of the assembly in which they will reside. Inc. All Rights Reserved 313 . In this lesson you will learn how to create components in the context of an assembly.

Presents a better picture of the overall design intent. Ability to validate function within the assembly. Commonly referred to as Top-Down assembly modeling. • • • • Ability to reference other parts in the assembly.Creating Parts in Place Creating parts in the context of the assembly enables you to take advantage of other geometry in the assembly by referencing the features of other parts to assist in the creation of new parts. this approach enables you to design new parts in the assembly environment in which they will reside. Example of Creating a Part in Place Access Methods The following methods are available for accessing the Create Component tool. Procedure Benefits to Creating Parts in Place The following list represents some of the benefits of creating parts in the context of the assembly. Ability to create adaptive relationships between parts. Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut N 314 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .

or create a new. Creating Parts and Subassemblies in Place . All Rights Reserved 315 . Browse: Click to browse for a template file. 1. Template: Select a template to use for the new part or assembly file. Inc. Click OK to create the new part. click the Create Component tool and enter the required values in the Create In-Place Component dialog box. • • Part: Select to create a new part file. On the Panel Bar.Create In-Place Component Dialog Box New FIle Name: Enter a name for the new file.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating parts and subassemblies in place. Constrain sketch plane to selected face or plane: Selecting this option will place a flush constraint between the new part and the selected face. 2. File Type: Select the file type in the drop-down list. Assembly: Select to create subassembly. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. assembly. Open an existing. New File Location: Enter the location for the new part or assembly file.

6. 4.3. Use the sketching tools available to create new sketch geometry or project geometry from other parts in the assembly. Select a face or plane to define the initial sketch plane on the new part. Use part modeling tools to create the 3D geometry. To create a subassembly in-place: 316 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . 5.

Inc. On the Panel Bar.7. All Rights Reserved 317 . 9. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. The subassembly is automatically activated. 8. Click OK to create the new subassembly. Select a face or plane to orient the new subassembly's origin. You can now create new parts in the context of the subassembly or place components that have already been created. click the Create Component tool and enter the required values in the Create In-Place Component dialog box.

You can use them to orient sketch planes on new parts and they can serve as the basis for additional work features in new parts. and Work Point tools to create new assembly based work features. Work Axis. remember that the assembly file contains it own coordinate system and origin work features. Concept You will also find the Work Plane.Using Work Features in Assemblies As you create components in the context of the assembly. Assembly Work Feature Being Used 318 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .

Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for using 2D Sketches in an assembly. Constraint Dragging 2D Parts in an Assembly Using 2D Sketches in the Assembly . As you do. All Rights Reserved 319 . You can create the fundamental sketch geometry you need to validate certain features and then exit the part and assign assembly constraints to the 2D parts in the same way you apply constraints to 3D features. it is not necessary to create 3D features in the initial design phases.Using 2D Sketches You can use 2D sketches in the assembly while you create new parts and validate design intent. Create a new part in the context of the assembly and use the sketching tools to create only the geometry required to validate function. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Procedure Using this technique enables you to validate the part's intended function before spending the time required to develop the parts final form. 1. Inc.

2. create additional parts containing 2D geometry and constrain as required. 5. If required. Validate the components by constraint dragging the 2D parts and/or editing dimensions and/or other constraints. Apply assembly constraints between the new 2D part and the existing parts. 4. Exit the part and return to the assembly environment. 3. 320 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . The 2D parts will react in the assembly the same way as a fully developed 3D part.

you can project edges and features from other parts in the assembly. you can create parts within the assembly with matching or uniform features. Associative reference geometry maintains a link to the original part and changes if the feature from which it was projected changes. Projecting Edges and Features The follow methods are available for accessing the tools to project edges and features. All Rights Reserved 321 . refer to the Autodesk Inventor Help system. Procedure When you project 2D geometry across parts in the assembly. Static reference geometry is not linked back to the originating part and will not change if the source features change. Geometry cannot be trimmed or dimensioned Static Reference Receiving part is not adaptive Degrees of freedom on receiving part are not effected. The following table represents some key differences between Associative Reference geometry and Static Reference geometry. The biggest difference between associative or static reference geometry is what happens to the projected geometry if the originating feature changes. Inc. You can also use this projected geometry to create features on the current part. Using this technique.Using Projected Edges and Features Using the same tools to project edges and features in a single part file. Each type offers unique benefits and drawbacks. Panel Bar Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Geometry cannot be trimmed or dimensioned For more information on the use of projected geometry. some of which are beyond the scope of this course. Associative Reference Receiving part is adaptive Degrees of freedom on receiving part are reduced. the resulting geometry will either be associative reference geometry or static reference geometry.

If this option is chosen Autodesk Inventor will assign an Adaptive status to the current part and active sketch. In the Options dialog box. Clearing this option will create static reference geometry. feature and part. on the Tools menu click Application Options. Adaptivity will be introduced later in this chapter.Assembly Tab (Partial) Cross Part Geometry Projection: Selecting this option will create associative reference geometry. it also adds a certain level of complexity to managing the geometry. Although this adds a degree of flexibility in regards to the design process. Projected Associative Reference Geometry 322 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .To enable or disable the associative reference geometry. the projected geometry is associative. Options Dialog Box . click the Assembly tab and adjust the option accordingly. In the image below. Note the appearance in the browser and the adaptive icon associated with the adaptive sketch.

There is no adaptive icon or linked reference to the sketch. Inc. Note the appearance of the sketch in the browser. When projecting cross-part geometry. All Rights Reserved 323 . while associative reference geometry is black. static reference geometry is magenta. Projected Static Reference Geometry Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.In the image below. projected geometry is static.

click Exercise: Creating Components in an Assembly 2. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. Components Created In-Place 324 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . You will use the 2D sketch geometry to validate assembly function before creating the 3D features. click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals.Exercise: Creating Components in an Assembly In this exercise. You will create additional parts in place and project geometry from other parts in the assembly. From the Main table of contents page. you will open an assembly and create new components using the techniques learned in this lesson. The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

All Rights Reserved 325 . Robot Assembly Before Driving Constraints Objectives After completing this lesson. you will be able to • • • • • Identify the remaining degrees of freedom on a part. and how they are affected by constraints Perform an unconstrained drag Perform a constrained drag Drive assembly constraints Move and rotate components in an assembly Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. In this lesson you will learn how to move components in an assembly.Moving Components Overview Overview Overview There are several methods available for moving components in an assembly. The method you choose will largely depend upon the constraint condition of the components and/or the task you need to accomplish. Inc.

click Degrees of Freedom or enter SHIFT+E. it is considered to be fully constrained. click the Occurrence tab and select the Degrees of Freedom option. They represent how you can move the component along or rotated about each of the X. When a part has no degrees of freedom remaining. Y. Concept As you apply assembly constraints to components. and Z axes. To view individual component's DOF symbol. • • To view the DOF symbols on all components in the assembly. is Translational freedom. You do not have to fully constrain any component in the assembly. The degrees of freedom that enable a component to move along an axis. How to View a Components Degrees of Freedom There are two methods available for viewing the DOF symbol on components in the assembly. In some cases you do not want to fully constrain a component. Degrees of Freedom Symbol The image above represents the DOF symbol that can be viewed on each part in the assembly. if you have an assembly with components that are designed to move along a given axis. In the Properties dialog box. For example. and on the shortcut menu. on the View menu. right-click on the component. then you should leave the degrees of freedom to allow that movement. while the degrees of freedom that enable a part to rotate about an axis is Rotational freedom.Degrees of Freedom Each component in an assembly will initially have six degrees of freedom (DOF). you reduce the degrees of freedom for the components being constrained. 326 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . click Properties.

Inc. The Effect of Constraints on Degrees of Freedom The following steps represent the effect of assembly constraints on degrees of freedom. one remains. Mate constraint being applied. three remain. All Rights Reserved 327 . Part is fully constrained. 2. Three degrees of freedom are removed. Because the first part in each assembly is automatically grounded. Two degrees of freedom removed. A grounded component has no degrees of freedom. it has no degrees of freedom remaining. Flush constraint being applied. The unconstrained component has all six degrees of freedom remaining.Grounded Components Note When components are grounded in an assembly. Flush constraint being applied. all degrees of freedom are removed. No remaining degrees of freedom. 4. 1. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. 3.

You are able to drag the component in the directions allowed by the remaining degrees of freedom. Procedure 328 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . It is sometimes necessary to move components in order to place assembly constraints. Other components constrained to the selected component will also move based upon their remaining degrees of freedom.Unconstrained Drag You can move unconstrained components by dragging them in the graphics window. Procedure Unconstrained Drag Constrained Drag To perform a constrained drag you click and drag on a component that is constrained in the assembly.

Shortcut Menu Right-click on a constraint and select Drive Constraint Drive Constraint Dialog Box Start: Enter a minimum value for the current constraint. this value will be an angle format. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. When you drive a constraint. You animate the assembly by driving the constraints through the range specified. For angular constraint. you may need to visualize the assembly in motion to see how the components interact with each other.Constraint Drivers As you build assemblies and add constraints to the parts. Procedure When you create assembly constraints. While you drive the constraint. these values are assigned a Start and End value. Driving constraints makes this visualization possible. other assembly constraints are constantly evaluated and the assembly components are only allowed to move through the available degrees of freedom for each component. Pause Delay: Enter a delay in seconds to be applied between steps. End: Enter a maximum value for the current constraint. for all other constraints. Access Methods The following methods are available for accessing the Drive Constraints tool. this value will represent a distance. All Rights Reserved 329 . each constraint type contains a property representing an offset or angle value. Inc.

the assembly is analyzed for interference as each component moves through its sequence. AVI rate: Specifies frame rate when recording the simulation. the dialog box will be minimized while recording the sequence. the motion is stopped at the point of interference.Player Controls: Use the standard player controls to drive the constraint through its sequence. will allow adaptive parts to update if necessary based upon changes in the assembly. Repetitions: • • Start/End: Runs the sequence from its Start position to its End position. Drive Adaptivity: When selected. • • • Amount of value: Uses the value below to increment each step of the sequence. Start/End/Start: Runs the sequence from its Start position to its End position and back to its Start position. Increment: Select the method for calculating the increment of simulation. Total # of steps: Uses the value below for the total number of steps for the sequence. Click to record the sequence to a standard AVI format. Collision Detection: When selected. 330 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Value: Enter a value for the increment method. Minimize dialog during recording: When selected. If a collision is detected.

Driving More Than One Constraint Note Although it is beyond the scope of this course. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. 2. through the use of parameters and formulas it is possible to drive more than one constraint at a time.Driving Constraints . All Rights Reserved 331 . Inc. In the browser. right-click on the constraint and on the shortcut menu. 3. for more information. Refer to the Advanced Assembly Modeling course from Autodesk.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for driving assembly constraints. adjust other settings as required and click the Play button to drive the constraint. Inc. 1. The assembly constraint is driven through its Start and End positions. click Drive Constraint. enter a Start and End value. In the Drive constraint dialog box.

Moving and Rotating Components To move constrained components in an assembly to facilitate adding additional constraints you use either Move Component or Rotate Component tools. select the appropriate tool then click and drag on the part being moved or rotated. enabling you to move or rotate the components independently from the degrees of freedom that may be remaining on the part. Using these tools. When you use these tools on a component in the assembly. the assembly constraints are temporarily ignored. you can move components in the assembly just as if they were not constrained at all. After you move or rotate the component click the Update button on the Standard toolbar to reapply the assembly constraints.Potential Cursors 332 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcuts V = Move G = Rotate Rotating Components . Access Methods The following methods are available for accessing the Move and Rotate Component tools. Procedure To move or rotate a component in the assembly.

Inc. Click and drag in the appropriate location to rotate the component. the 3D Rotate symbol appears similar to the 3D Rotate symbol when rotating views. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. it will not move back to its original location after performing an Update. All Rights Reserved 333 .When you rotate components. Moving or Rotating Grounded Components Note If you move or rotate a grounded component.

From the Main table of contents page. You will then use the techniques learned in this lesson to move the components and drive assembly constraints. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals. click Exercise: Moving Components 2. Robot Assembly Before Driving Constraints 334 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . you will open an assembly and view the available degrees of freedom on different components.Exercise: Moving Components In this exercise. The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Constraining Components Overview Overview Overview When you build assemblies you define parametric relationships between the parts in the assembly. there are a couple of ways to view the constraints in the browser. and if necessary edit the constraints. The relationships created between parts using assembly constraints. In this lesson you will learn how to apply. realistically mimics real-world situations and operating conditions of the assembly components. All Rights Reserved 335 . and edit assembly constraints. view. Inc. You apply assembly constraints to the parts to define their position and available degrees of freedom. You use the Constraint tool or the ALT-Drag method to apply constraints without using the Place Constraint dialog box. you will be able to • • • • Understand how assembly constraints effect individual parts in the assembly Apply and edit basic assembly constraints in the assembly View assembly constraints in the browser Use the ALT-Drag method to apply assembly constraints Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. After you apply the constraints. LCD-Mount Assembly Objectives After completing this lesson.

Concept There are four types of assembly constraints that can be applied between parts: mate. When you start the Constraint tool. tangent. an insert. Using this approach enables you to develop an assembly of parts that interact as intended with other parts in the assembly. you should apply the constraints using the simplest approach possible while using constraint solutions that will constrain the parts as completely as required by the design intent. then it should be grounded or constrained to assembly level work features. Example of Assembly Constraint Simple but complete When you apply assembly constraints to parts. angle. or work features (work planes. axes. or with constraint conditions that do not fully represent the intended function of the part in the assembly. The features to which the constraints are applied can be geometric part features. If a component in an assembly is not intended to be constrained to other components. The geometry that you choose is dependent upon the type of constraint you apply. after you select the type of constraint. 336 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . You are not required to fully constrain parts in the assembly. or points) at the assembly or part level. mimic the real world conditions of the parts in the assembly by using assembly constraint solutions that most closely resemble how the parts will be assembled after manufacturing. you will select one feature on each part to apply it. The constraint type chosen will depend upon the part features and the design intent. As you plan the constraints.Placing Constraints You apply each assembly constraint to either two components in the assembly or to one component and one assembly origin feature. but parts should not be left unconstrained.

you could use a variety of different constraint solutions to assemble these two components. However after analyzing how the components will be put together. Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. select the Hidden Edge Display options to display all edges on the parts. All Rights Reserved 337 . Example of Proper Constraint Planning Placing Constraints on Obstructed Geometry Tip When placing constraints on obstructed geometry or features. on the Standard toolbar. the proper constraint is used to mimic the real world process of assembling the two components.In the image below.

you are given a preview of how the constraint will be applied. Depending on the type of constraint. the overall process of applying constraints is the same. and the geometry chosen. click the Constraint tool and select the type of constraint to apply.Process Overview Although each type of constraint will create a different result. 3. Select the features to apply the constraints. 338 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .How to Place Constraints . Open or create an assembly. The following steps represent an overview for applying constraints. On the Panel Bar. 2. 1.

All Rights Reserved 339 . 5.4. Additional constraints being applied. Click apply to create the constraint then continue to add additional constraints as required. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. If necessary adjust the solution option and enter an offset or angle value. 6. Inc.

Procedure Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut C Place Constraint Dialog Box Type: Select the type of constraint to create. This option is usually used in situations where the feature you are attempting to constrain is obstructed by other parts in the assembly. The offset or angle value is calculated based upon the 340 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Refer to the section below for available solution options for each. You must first select the part. enabling you to preview the constraint and confirm or change the constraint settings. Enter a value for the offset or angle of the constraint.Basic Constraints There are four basic assembly constraints. then select the feature for the constraint. Selections: As you select features. Predict Offset and Orientation: Only available for Mate and Angle constraints. Pick Part First: This option limits the feature selections to the selected part. The components will move into position. Each are designed to create a certain constraint condition between the components in the assembly. click the appropriate selection button and reselect the geometry. Offset/Angle: The label for this field will change depending on the type of constraint you select. If you need to change a selected feature. this option automatically inserts the angle or offset value if the offset field is blank. Solution: Each constraint type offers different solutions. Preview Constraint: This option previews the constraint before applying. the selection1 and selection2 buttons are automatically activated.

planes. and points. The following represents examples using the Mate constraint. Flush: Selected faces will be coplanar. This is useful in applying constraints without moving the geometry from its current position. Valid selections include faces. Inc. To override this setting. enter the offset/angle value manually. All Rights Reserved 341 . axes. edges. Mate Constraint/Mate Solution .Face/Face Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.part's current position and is inserted into the offset/angle field. Mate Constraint You use the mate constraint to mate selected geometry.Axis/Axis Mate Constraint/Mate Solution . Solution Options: Mate: Selected geometry will be mated to each other. You can also enter an offset value to offset the geometry.

Face/Face 342 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . This helps resolve situations in which the component's orientation flips during a constraint drive or drag. or lines.Point/Point Mate Constraint/Flush Solution . planes. the angle is measured by using the right-hand rule.Face/Face Angle Constraint Use the angle constraint to specify an angle between faces.Mate Constraint/Mate Solution . Undirected Angle: This is the default solution and it allows either orientation of the angle constraint. Angle Constraint . Solution Options: Directed Angle: Using this solution option.

Inc. Tangent Constraint/Outside Solution . This requires the selection of two circular edges. Aligned: This solution will align the face normals.Circular Face . Solution Options: Opposed: This solution will force the face normals to be opposed. Solution Options: Inside: Creates an inside tangent solution. Outside: Creates an outside tangent solution. The center point of the edge is calculated and the result is a constraint in which the center lines are aligned and the selected edges are made coplanar. All Rights Reserved 343 .Tangent Constraint Use the tangent constraint to define a tangency condition between one circular feature and plane or face.Circular Face: Insert Constraint Use the insert constraint to insert a circular part feature into another circular part feature. Insert Constraint Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. or between two circular features.

If you select a constraint in the browser it will highlight the geometry referenced by the constraint.Position View When you create assembly constraints. This image displays how the assembly constraint appears under each part that it has been applied. suppress. or delete a constraint. you can access the constraint under either part. Viewing Assembly Constraints in the Browser 344 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .Viewing Constraints After you create the assembly constraints you can view them in the browser different ways. If you need to edit. each part or origin feature is associated with one-half of the constraint. when the browser is in the default Position View. Each constraint is listed twice in the browser. Procedure Constraint Geometry Highlighted Browser . for example.

Browser - Modeling View
If you change the browser view to Modeling View, the constraints appear under the Constraints folder. You can expand the folder to access the constraints. Using this view places all the constraints in one location however, it can be difficult to identify constraints on specific parts in larger assemblies.

Assembly Constraints in Browser - Modeling View

Shortcut Menu Options
In the browser, if you right-click on a constraint the following shortcut menu is displayed. Find in Window: Zooms the current view to geometry containing the selected constraint. This assists you in identifying the constraint graphically. Other Half: This option highlights the other half of the constraint, by expanding the other component to which it has been applied and highlighting the constraint. This option helps identify which components the constraint has been applied to.

Constraint Shortcut Menu Options

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

345

Editing Constraints
You can edit the constraint much the same way you edit placed features. Locate the constraint in the browser, then right-click on the constraint and on the shortcut menu, click Edit.
Procedure

Editing Constraints

When you edit a constraint, all edits are done in the same dialog box used to create the constraint. All options can be changed including the type of constraint.

Editing Constraints

346

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals

Changing the Constraint Offset/Angle Value
There are two methods to change the constraint offset/angle value without using the Edit Constraint dialog box. • Using the Edit Box at the bottom of the browser: Selecting a constraint will cause the Edit Box to appear at the bottom of the browser. Enter a new offset/angle value for the constraint and press ENTER.

Using the Edit Dimension dialog box: In the browser, right-click on the constraint and on the shortcut menu, click Modify. The Edit Dimension dialog box will appear. Enter a new offset/angle value and press ENTER or click the green check mark.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

347

Using ALT -Drag to Place Constraints
The ALT-Drag method is an alternate method for placing assembly constraints. Hold the ALT key down, then click and drag on the feature receiving the constraint. A constraint glyph will appear indicating the type of constraint being applied. Continue to drag the cursor to another part in the assembly and touch another valid feature. Then release the mouse button to create the assembly constraint.
Procedure

ALT-Drag Constraint Glyph

ALT-Drag Constraint Types
When you use the ALT-Drag method to apply constraints, the constraint type is based upon the geometry you select. You can change the constraint type by pressing the appropriate key. Release the ALT key but you must continue to hold down the left mouse button. • Mate: M or 1 • Angle: A or 2 • Tangent: T or 3 • Insert: I or 4

348

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals

ALT-Drag to Place Constraints - Process Overview
The following steps represent an overview for using the ALT-Drag method to apply assembly constraints. 1. While holding the ALT key, select the feature to be constrained and while holding the left mouse button down, drag the part. You can release the ALT key but you must hold the mouse button down.

2.

While holding the mouse button down, drag the part to the next feature to assign the constraint and release the mouse when the part is in place.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

349

Exercise: Constraining Components
In this exercise, you use the concepts and techniques learned in this lesson to constrain components in the assembly. After you apply the constraints you will edit some constraints to see the effect on the assembly.
Print Exercise Reference

To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook:
1. From the Main table of contents page, click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals, click Exercise: Constraining Components

2.

The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

LCD-Mount Assembly

350

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals

Adaptive Components
Overview Overview

Overview
Adaptivity is intended to give the designer a way to create parts that can adapt to the assembly in which they are being used. Historically, parametric modeling systems required the use of complex cross-part parametric equations in order for one part to change size if another part in the assembly changed. One problem with this technique, is that cross-part parametric equations could become so complex, that even the original designer could have problems managing the relationship and equations used in such an environment. With the introduction of Adaptivity, Autodesk Inventor enables the designer to create adaptive relationships between parts in an assembly, that do not require the use of complex cross-part parameters. Largely based upon assembly constraints, Adaptivity enables a part to change based upon changes in other parts in the assembly to which it has been constrained. Furthermore, with Autodesk Inventor you can mix both Parametric dimensions and adaptivity within the same part and/or assembly. Thus, you can control the design intent by using the most appropriate technique. Although an in depth discussion of Adaptivity is beyond the scope of the course, you will learn the essential aspects of creating adaptive assemblies using Autodesk Inventor.

Completed Assembly with Adaptive Parts

Objectives
After completing this lesson, you will be able to • • • Understand adaptive features and how you use them Create adaptive features and sketches Use adaptive occurrences in an assembly and control them with constraints
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

351

Introduction to Adaptive Features
Adaptivity is not intended to be used in all parts and assemblies. The key to using adaptive features effectively is knowing when to use them.
Concept

When you create a part containing adaptive features, their size is allowed to change when the assembly conditions require them to do so in order to successfully resolve constraints and associative sketches. You can use different approaches to create adaptive features, for example, you can design the part outside of the assembly and make specific features adaptive for later use, or create a part in the context of the assembly, and project geometry from other parts in the assembly, to automatically create adaptive features. In the example below, the gasket component was created by using an adaptive crosspart projection from the flange component. By changing dimensions on the flange component, the gasket features change to match the changes on the flange.

Adaptive Component - Before and After

Identifying Adaptive Parts and Features
Parts and features are identified in the browser with an adaptive icon indicating the adaptive status. It must be present at each level in order for adaptivity to function. At minimum you will have two adaptive indicators: (a) at the part level in the assembly, and (b) at the feature level. The adaptive indicator only appears at the sketch level if the sketch contains associative geometry or has been set to be adaptive.

352

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals

When to Use Adaptive Features
The following list represents some of the occasions to use adaptivity. • • • Your part contains features that are largely dependent for size or position, with other parts in the assembly. Your parts share common sketch geometry such as mating flanges. You need an easy way to update parts in the assembly when changes are required.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

353

Methods for Creating Adaptive Features
There are two methods available for creating adaptive features. The method you choose depends upon the design intent and which aspects of the geometry needs to be adaptive. While some adaptive features may only require certain parameters, such as extrusion distance, to change others may require the underlying sketch geometry to change as well.
Procedure

Using an associative reference sketch to create a feature. When you create parts in the context of the assembly, you can project geometry from other parts onto the current sketch. Depending upon the current Application Options settings, this geometry will either be associative reference or static. When the result of the geometry you project is associative reference geometry, the sketch is automatically set to be adaptive and any changes to the originating geometry will reflect in the reference geometry. To access this setting, on the Tools menu, click Application Options and click the Assembly tab.

Use Associative Reference Sketches to • Create a new component with features that need to mate with other features in the assembly. • Create a new component with features whose size and position are dependent upon the features of other parts in the assembly. For example a flange and end cap. • Create features that mate with a zero clearance. Create an underconstrained feature, and then make it adaptive. You create the sketch geometry and intentionally leave the geometry underconstrained. In order for a sketch feature to adapt, it must be underconstrained specifically on the elements of the sketch that you require to be adaptive. After you create the feature, in the browser, right-click on the

354

Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals

a hole feature has the following properties that can be set as adaptive. • • Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. For example. Assign specific feature properties as adaptive. • Sketch (must be underconstrained) • Hole Depth • Nominal Diameter • Counterbore Diameter • Counterbore Depth Any or all of these features can be set as adaptive in the Feature Properties dialog box. Create adaptive relationships when there is no existing geometry to project. Each feature you create has specific properties can be set as adaptive.feature and click Adaptive on the shortcut menu. All Rights Reserved 355 . Inc. Use Underconstrained Adaptive Features to • • • • • Create adaptive relationships with 2D layout sketch geometry. Adapt a feature to a component in another assembly level. Creating mating features and control assembly clearances with constraint offset values. Create adaptive relationships before you know which parts in the assembly you will constrain the adaptive features to.

Create a new part in the context of the assembly and activate the sketch to receive to associative reference geometry. click Application Options. on the Panel Bar. the changes are automatically reflected in the referencing associative sketch. Procedure Adaptive Sketch Example In the image above. In the Options dialog box. click the Assembly tab and confirm that the Enable Associative Edge/Loop Geometry Projection During In-Place Modeling is selected. On the Tools menu. Open or create an assembly containing at least one part. Creating Adaptive Sketches . With sketch activated. click the Project Geometry tool and select the edges or loops to be projected onto the new 356 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . then click OK.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating adaptive sketches. the Adaptive-Gasket's base feature sketch geometry is projected from the underlying flange part. If changes to the flange's sketch geometry occur. If the originating geometry changes.Adaptive Sketches You create adaptive sketches by projecting cross-part geometry as associative reference geometry. they will be automatically reflected in the projected adaptive sketch. 1. 3. 2.

Inc. The projected geometry will appear on the sketch and in the browser as an adaptive reference. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. 5. All Rights Reserved 357 . Use the projected sketch geometry to create the required sketched features. to project a loop. select a point inside the edges.part. If necessary make changes to the original part and view the changes reflected in the adaptive part. 6. select the edges specifically. 4. To project single edges.

the adaptive part is created with the initial sketch intentionally underconstrained. the adaptive part is driven through a series of updates and changes in size. adaptive. The options available will depend upon the type of feature selected. The feature properties dialog box contains an Adaptive section enabling you to determine which aspects of the feature are allowed to adapt. Adaptive Feature Example In the browser. right-click on a feature and select Properties on the shortcut menu. or by making specific feature properties. Procedure In the image below. By leaving the geometry underconstrained. such as an extrusion distance. Using Mate and Flush assembly constraints. Feature Properties Dialog Box 358 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . it is able to adapt to other features based upon assembly constraints.Adaptive Features You create Adaptive features by leaving certain aspects of the feature underconstrained. You do this by leaving dimensions and/or constraints off of sketch geometry.

right-click on the feature and select Adaptive from the shortcut menu. Inc. 2. All Rights Reserved 359 . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. In the browser.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating adaptive features. 3. 1.Creating Adaptive Features . Create the part as required using standard sketch features. Create a new part in the assembly with an underconstrained sketch.

click the Assembly tab and select the Features are initially adaptive option. Continue to add assembly constraints as required by the design intent. In the Options dialog box. 360 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Add assembly constraints according to the design intent. On the Tools menu. Setting Initial Adaptive Feature Status Note You can set part features to be adaptive automatically as soon as they are created. 6. The adaptive part will update to validate the assembly constraint. 5. The part feature updates to validate the assembly constraint. click Application Options.4. Continue to add assembly constraints as required by the design intent. The part feature updates to validate the assembly constraint.

only one occurrence can be specified as adaptive. the part's adaptive status is not initially set. you can use the Save Copy As command and save the part with a unique name for each adaptive occurrence you require in other assemblies. In the Tri-Assembly. If you require the same part to be adaptive in multiple assemblies. Also. caused by adaptivity. it cannot be used adaptively in another. In an assembly containing multiple occurrences of an adaptive part. All Rights Reserved 361 . right-click on the part. note that only one occurrence of the Pin-A component is set to be adaptive. When a component is being used adaptively in one assembly. the Pin-A component no longer fits the hole size of the Tri-Base. or other modifications.iam file. then click Adaptive on the shortcut menu. changes to the Pin-A component forced by adaptivity in the first assembly. In the Adaptive-Occurrence. As a result.ipt.Adaptive Occurrence in Assemblies When you add a part to an assembly that was created outside of the assembly and contains adaptive features. the under constrained features on the adaptive part will resize to validate the assembly constraints. To set the part as adaptive. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All other occurrences in the assembly will update to reflect the adaptive changes. each containing a reference to the PinA component. will be reflected in every assembly in which the part is used. are also reflected in the second assembly. Procedure When you constrain the adaptive part to fixed features on other components. in this example. Any changes made to the adaptive occurrence will be automatically reflected in other occurrences. The image below represents two assembly files.iam file. the same Pin-A component is being referenced. It is important to note that any changes to the adaptive part. Inc.iam file. Because it is used adaptively in the AdaptiveOccurrences. in the browser or graphics window. it cannot be used adaptively in this assembly.

This step is critical for performance. Procedure • • Adaptivity is not intended to be the cure all for all cross-part design challenges. When this message appears. then performance could be seriously effected. the component will move according to the remaining degrees of freedom before it adapts. If you click Cancel. assembly performance can be effected. or a constraint or dimension is preventing the adaptive change to occur. it means that either some aspect of the feature's properties is not specified to be adaptive. When you apply assembly constraints to adaptive components. After you resolve the adaptive issue. when you use adaptive parts. Procedure The image below represents a common error that can occur when you apply constraints to adaptive components. An adaptive change will only occur when there are no remaining degrees of freedom that can be used to validate the constraint. Depending on the complexity of the assembly and parts. If your assembly contains hundreds (if not thousands) of parts. For each adaptive part in an assembly. additional processing is required. and sketch geometry. as any changes to a feature will force Autodesk Inventor to evaluate the adaptivity. the constraint will be validated automatically.Applying Assembly Constraints You apply Assembly constraints to adaptive parts the same way you apply constraints to non-adaptive components. and investigate the adaptive component's features. After the adaptive changes have been applied. Although the message does not give details about the specific problem. you will have to reapply the constraint. Common Assembly Constraint Error Tips and Considerations for Using Adaptivity The following list represents some tips and consideration for using Adaptivity. turn off the adaptive status of the part in the assembly. Cancel or Accept the message. If you click Accept. • 362 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . the constraint will be saved in an error state.

click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals. From the Main table of contents page. you will create three adaptive components in the assembly using both associative reference edges and adaptive features. All Rights Reserved 363 . You will then modify the AdpReservoir component and view the effects on the adaptive components in the assembly. Completed Assembly with Adaptive Parts Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. click Exercise: Adaptive Components 2. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.Exercise: Adaptive Components In this exercise. Inc. The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

and finding existing components. In this lesson you will learn to analyze the assembly for interference between parts. you will be able to • • • Analyze components in the assembly for interference Analyze faces on the part using the Zebra Style analysis Locate components using the Find option 364 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Completed Interference Analysis Objectives After completing this lesson. You will also learn to perform different surface analyses on parts as well as using the Find option in the open dialog box to locate components based upon certain search criteria.Assembly Analysis Overview Overview Overview There are different tools available to assist you in analyzing components that are used in an assembly.

Components within this set will be compared against components in Set #1. You can select components in the browser or in the graphics window. you may need to determine whether or not components in the assembly interfere with each other.The Analyze Interference Tool As you design components for your assembly. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Define Set #2: Click this button then select the components to include in the second set. The Analyze Interference tool enables you to check for interference between components in the assembly. Pull Down Menu Tools > Interference Analysis Dialog Box Define Set #1: Click this button then select the components to include in the first set. Including components in this set is optional. If you define both sets and components within the same set interfere with each other. When the interference analysis is performed. Procedure Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Analyze Interference tool. All Rights Reserved 365 . Inc. To check for interference by comparing each component to each other component. You can select components in the browser or in the graphics window. Components within this set will be compared against components in Set #2. the interference will not be detected. components in Set #1 are checked for interference with components in Set #2. select all components for Set #1 and leave Set #2 empty.

1. You can also print it for further review. indicating the components and locations of interference. the Interference Detected dialog box appears. Interference Detected Dialog Box Analyzing Interference . Open an assembly. 2.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for analyzing the assembly for interference between components. You can copy this information to the clipboard and then paste it into another application. 366 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .If interferences are detected. click Analyze Interference and select the components to be included in Set #1. On the Tools menu.

the Interference Detected dialog box appears giving a total number of interferences and the total volume. Tip To prevent interference between threaded holes and fasteners.3. Inc. use the major diameter option to create the threaded hole. 4. The areas of interference are indicated in red in the graphics window. All Rights Reserved 367 . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. If an interference is found. Click the Define Set #2 button and select the components to be compared against the components in Set #1. Interference Between Threaded Holes and Standard Parts. Then click OK. You can expand the dialog box for more information and to copy and/or print the results.

Definition: Use these options to control the orientation of the pattern. Procedure Each style is designed to perform specific analysis and will present the results of the analysis in a unique way. Selection: In the Selection area.The Analyze Faces Tool The Analyze Faces tool offers two different analysis styles. You use this style to check the continuity between surfaces. 368 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Analyze Faces Dialog Box . Zebra Analysis The Zebra Analysis analyzes the selected part or faces by checking for continuity between surfaces. and opacity of the pattern. Pull Down Menu Tools > Standard Toolbar Toggles the analysis display on/ off. click the arrow button to select the part or faces.Zebra Analysis In the Style area click the left button to activate the Zebra Analysis. Delete: Click to delete the selection set. thickness of the stripes. New: Click to define a new selection set of faces. You use the Zebra Analysis to analyze consistency between faces and use the Draft Analysis style to analyze the suitability of a part for casting. In this lesson you will learn how to perform each of these analyses. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Analyze Faces tool.

Analyze Faces Dialog Box .Part: Enables you to select the entire part for analysis. Draft Analysis You use the Draft Analysis style to check the suitability of a part for casting. In the example above. indicating surface continuity. Face drafts are generally used to alleviate this problem by applying slight draft angles between faces. All Rights Reserved 369 . Faces: Enables you to select individual faces for analysis. The Zebra Stripes make a uniform transition from one face to the other.Draft Analysis Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. the Zebra Stripe pattern would indicate this with a non-uniform transition from one face to the next. The colors represent the draft angle range between angles specified. 90 degree angles can cause problems when trying to pull the mold away from the part. the selected faces are being analyzed for continuity along their common edge. Inc. If there were gaps between the selected faces. The Draft Analysis style analyzes the selected part or faces and presents the results in a range of colors on the selected part or faces. When you design parts for casting. Click OK or Apply to display the results.

In the Selection area. The green areas indicate safe draft angles while the red areas indicate 90 degree conditions. click the arrow to define. Delete: Click to delete the selection set. The color ranges from blue (negative angle specified) to red (0 degree draft angle) to Green (positive angle specified). the a draft analysis as been performed on the selected faces.In the Style area click the right button to activate the Draft Analysis. Part: Enables you to select the entire part for analysis. while Red indicates 0 degree draft angles which could cause problems when trying to pull the mold away from the part. New: Click to define a new selection set of faces. Faces: Enables you to select individual faces for analysis. have acceptable draft angles. Faces represented in Blue or Green. You can define individual selection sets with separate pull-directions. and if necessary flip the pull direction for the current selection set. In the example above. 370 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Selection: In the Selection area click the arrow button to select the part or faces. Click OK or Apply to display the results. Definition: Enter the draft angle range to use for the analysis.

You create the search criteria by selecting the property from the Property drop-down list. Both tools function the same way. All Rights Reserved 371 . Procedure There are two slightly different versions of the Find dialog box. the only difference is that the latter only searches the active assembly file. Access Methods Use the following methods to access tools for locating files Autodesk Inventor files. Inc. Click the Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Locating Components You can use the Find tool to locate files or components within the active assembly. Open Dialog Box Edit Menu (Assemblies Only) Locates components within the active assembly only. The Find Assembly Components dialog box is accessed by clicking Find on the Edit menu. while working in the context of the assembly. and highlights and selects the matching components in the browser. provide a value. You then select the appropriate condition and if necessary. You can create different searches by defining criteria based upon various file properties and save these custom searches for later use. Find Find CTRL+F The main window in each of these dialog boxes lists the current search criteria. You access the Find: Autodesk Inventor Files dialog by clicking the Find button on the Open dialog box. Keyboard Shortcut (Assemblies Only) Locates components within the active assembly only.

where it would be difficult to manually locate components in the browser. then click Find Now to search for Autodesk Inventor files that meet the criteria defined.Add to list button to add the criteria to the main window list. and the Open Search button to load previously saved searches. Components that meet the criteria will be highlighted in the browser. Use the Save Search button to save the search for later use. Find Assembly Components 372 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . then click Find Now to search for components in the active assembly that meet the defined criteria. Build and optionally save the search criteria. You use this tool for large assemblies. Find Autodesk Inventor Files Dialog Box Build and optionally save the search criteria.

Inc. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals. click Exercise: Assembly Analysis 2. You will use the Analyze Faces tool to analyze faces on a part file and complete the exercise by using the Find tool to find various files. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. Completed Interference Analysis Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Exercise: Assembly Analysis In this exercise. you will use the concepts and techniques learned in this lesson to perform an interference analysis on an assembly. From the Main table of contents page. All Rights Reserved 373 .

you will be able to • • • Create a Presentation View Create Tweaks and Trails in a Presentation View Animate a Presentation View 374 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . If you require exploded views in your drawing you will first need to create the exploded view in a Presentation file. In this lesson you will learn to create exploded views and animations. Visualize the interaction between parts in the assembly by animating the exploded view to show the assembly's transition between the assembled and exploded states.Presentations Overview Overview Overview You use Presentations files to create exploded views of the assembly.ipn file which references the assembly and part files for the geometry. • The Presentation file is stored as a separate *. You can also use the Presentation environment to: • Help explain and visualize components in the assembly that would otherwise be obstructed from view when the assembly is shown in its assembled condition. Assembly Exploded View Objectives After completing this lesson.

Presentation Environment The Presentation Environment is similar to the part modeling and assembly environment. All Rights Reserved 375 . you must create a Presentation File. on the New fly-out menu. the graphics window displays the assembly geometry you use in the presentation views. Procedure On the Standard toolbar. and the browser displays view names and other information relevant to the Presentation environment. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Default templates are available for Presentation files. There is no limit to the number of presentation views you can create. You store the Presentation in an *. Presentation Environment Creating a Presentation View You use a Presentation View to create exploded views of the assembly.ipn file. Inc. The Panel Bar contains the tools you use to create the Presentations. select Presentation. but you can only reference one assembly in each Presentation file.Creating a Presentation Before you create a Presentation View.

If you do not currently have an assembly file open. it will be listed automatically in the File field. This option is only available if you select Automatic. the Select Assembly dialog box is displayed. Click the browse button to browse for a different design view file. 376 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Panel Bar When you select the Create View tool. you will need to enter the path for the assembly or select the browse button to browse for the assembly file. Automatic: This option creates the exploded view by automatically moving the components in the assembly based on the distance you enter in the Distance field. Explosion Method: Select the explosion method from the following options. will be moved automatically. Only components with certain assembly constraints such as Mate. You explode the view later by adding tweaks to move each component.Access Methods Use the following methods to access to Create View tool. Distance: Enter an explosion distance to move each component. Select Assembly Dialog Box File: If you already have an assembly file open. Design View: Select the Design View to use as the basis for the Presentation View. and Insert. Create Trails: This option will create trails indicating the path of each component from its assembled position to the exploded position. Manual: This option creates the Presentation View without exploding the assembly components.

double-click on the view in the browser. The view names listed here are the same view names available to create a 2D drawing view later. Create a new Presentation file. Inc. then click OK to create the Presentation View. To automatically explode the components. click the Create View tool. select the Automatic explosion method and enter a distance in the Distance field. enter or browse for the assembly file to use in the Presentation View. 1. click the Create Trails option. You can expand it to display the assembly components. In the Select Assembly dialog box. 2. To activate a view. If necessary you can rename the view by performing a slow double-click on the name in the browser. Accept the default Design View or select one from the drop-down list. On the Panel Bar. Other options are available for filtering the information presented in the browser. Presentation View Creating a Presentation View . To create trails on the components. All Rights Reserved 377 .Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating a Presentation View. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Each Presentation View is displayed in the browser.The image below represents a typical presentation containing two Presentation Views.

4. Expand the view to see the components and tweaks automatically applied. If you need to edit the tweak.3. 378 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . enter a new value in the Edit Box at the bottom of the browser. The Presentation View is created accordingly and appears in the Presentation Browser. Continue to create presentation views as required.

Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. you can select elements of the triad to control the transformation. most exploded views will require manual tweaks. Select a face or edge on any component to display the Triad icon. All Rights Reserved 379 . Procedure When you tweak a component you can move and/or rotate the component in any direction. Even if you have chosen the automatic explosion method. The direction does not have to be defined from a feature on the part you tweak. you may need to add tweaks to the components to move them to new locations in the exploded view. which represent a path from the components current location after tweaks have been applied. Trails help clarify how a component in an exploded view fits into the overall assembly. The blue axis indicates the current transformation axis. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Tweak Components tool. Once the direction triad appears. Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut T Tweak Component Dialog Box Direction: Click the Direction button to define the direction of the tweak. When the tweaks are created you also have the option of displaying the trails.Creating Tweaks and Trails After you create the presentation view. to its assembled location.

Y. Clicking the X. start dragging the distance with the cursor away from existing components. Trail Origin: Click the Trail Origin button to select a different trail origin. Enter a distance or angle value for the tweak and click the green check mark button. This option enables you to move the component along the selected axis. If you select a component by mistake. You can use the value field for tranlational and rotational tweaks. This option enables you to rotate the component around the selected axis. deselect it by holding down the CTL key and reselecting the component. You can select the option to move or rotate the component. Note: When you drag the tweak distance. or Z here is the same as selecting each axis on the triad in the graphics window.You can switch the active direction by: • • Choosing another axis in the Tweak Component dialog box. Components: Click the Components button to select the components to tweak. Transformations: In the Tweak Component dialog box. Display Trails: Select this option to display trails showing the path of the tweak. Selecting the axis on the Triad to make it current. 380 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . in the Transformations area you can set the transformation options for the tweak. Inadvertently selecting a point over a component will add that component to the tweak.

1. On the Panel Bar. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. click the Tweak Components tool and select face or edge to define the tweak direction. You will select the trail then adjust the tweak value. By rotating the triad. All Rights Reserved 381 . Create a Presentation View. Inc. you can tweak the component in different angles. Triad Only: Select this option to rotate the triad only. 2.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating tweaks and trails.Edit Existing Trail: Click the Edit Existing Trail button to edit an existing trail. Clear: Click to clear the current tweak and continue adding tweaks. This option is only available when the rotational transformation is selected. Close: Click to close the dialog box. In the same area. 3. Creating Tweaks and Trails . Select the components to be included in the tweak. click the green check button to finish tweaking the triad.

Click and drag in a blank area of the graphics window and then click Clear to apply the tweak and continue. Select the components to include in the tweak. When finished. 6. Confirm the Transformation settings then click and drag in a blank area of the screen. Select a face or edge to define the direction.4. 5. Click Clear to apply the tweak and continue. click Close. 7. Repeat the steps above to continue tweaking components. 382 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . and confirm the transformation direction.

Select items in the list and use the Group and Ungroup buttons to move items in and out of sequence groups. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Animate tool. they appear as a group in the sequence list. or pause. If you select items in the sequence list. some of which are beyond the scope of this course. in the Motion area. click the Record button to record the animation to an standard AVI file. You can record the animation to a standard AVI format for use on other computers. All items in a sequence group are animated at the same time. When you tweak multiple components at the same time. Expand the dialog box to examine the tweak sequence. After you play the animation. By default the animation will play in the reverse order that you applied the tweaks. use the standard player controls to play. Panel Bar After you start the Animate tool.Animating a Presentation View After you create the Presentation View. rewind. Procedure There are several options available to animate the presentation view. Inc. In the Animation dialog box. it is possible to animate the explosion sequence and visualize the components in the assembly moving into or out of their assembled position. you can use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to change the animation sequence of the selected tweak. In this lesson you will learn the basics for animating a Presentation View. click Reset to reset the sequence back to the beginning. Animation Dialog Box Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 383 .

Browser Sequence View 384 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . Using this view it is possible to drag and drop component tweaks from one sequence to another.Browser Sequence View Click the Filter button at the top of the browser and select Sequence View on the flyout menu. This will display the tweaks in the sequence order that will be played during the animation sequence.

click Exercise: Presentations 2. you will create an exploded view of the components and then animate that exploded view. click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals. All Rights Reserved 385 . you will create a new presentation file of an assembly.Exercise: Presentations In this exercise. Inc. The completed exercise is shown in the following image. After creating the presentation. Assembly Exploded View Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. From the Main table of contents page. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.

click Challenge Exercise: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals 2. Completed Assembly Challenge 386 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals . From the Main table of contents page. click Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals From the table of contents for Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals. The completed exercise is shown in the following image.Challenge Exercise: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals Challenge Exercise: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals Print Exercise Reference In this exercise. you will use the concepts and techniques learned in this chapter to create the assembly pictured in the image below. To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.

Chapter Summary Summary You learned the following in this chapter: Summary • • • • • • • • • • • • • • What constitutes an assembly model and the overall process used to create them. Activating components and controlling the appearance properties of the browser. Inc. Perform several different assembly related operations using the assembly browser. The different approaches that can be used when creating assembly models and the environment and interface used as you create the assembly. Resequencing and restructuring an assembly. Using assembly based work features to constrain components and using parts consisting of only 2D geometry to validate design intent. Degrees of Freedom and how they effect each part in the assembly. Placing components in the assembly using the Place Component tool. Tips and considerations for using Adaptive parts in your assembly. All Rights Reserved 387 . Alternative methods for placing constraints on components in the assembly. Creating Design Views to save custom views and display characteristics of the assembly. • • • • Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Placing assembly constraints on components in your assembly. Methods for creating adaptive features and sketches and how to control the adaptive status of these features. Potential outside sources of geometry not created with Autodesk Inventor. Replacing existing components in the assembly. Projecting geometry from other parts in the assembly when creating new components. Simulating motion in an assembly by driving constraints and temporarily repositioning components in the assembly by using the Move Component and Rotate Component tools. Creating new parts in the context of the assembly. while understanding the potential effect on assembly constraints when doing so.

388 Chapter 6: Assembly Modeling Fundamentals .

Create and edit detail views. Creating and editing broken views. Editing projected views and the options that are available. Copy and/or move drawing views between sheets in the drawing.Introduction to Drawings Chapter Introduction In this chapter you learn about. Create and use text styles and dimension styles. Creating and editing section views on your drawing. Project isometric views from the section to create an isometric section view. • Create and utilize the available drafting standard to control properties of your drawing. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • . Creating and editing auxiliary views on your sheet. Creating general types of annotation on your drawing. Retrieve model dimensions for use in the drawing. Create and edit section views. Creating and using text styles and dimension styles. Placing reference dimensions on the sheet. Retrieving model dimensions for use in the drawing. Managing views and sections after they have been created. you will be able to.. Perform several functions involving drawing resources. Create base and projected views. Create and edit broken views on your sheet. • • • • • • • • • In this chapter After completing this chapter. Copying and/or moving views between sheets in the drawing. • Creating and utilizing the available drafting standards to control several properties of your drawing. Creating detail views to magnify portions of your drawing view. Creating base and projected views of your part or assembly files. Create and edit auxiliary views on your sheet. Creating and editing break out views as an alternative to standard section views... Using various drawing resources..

You use them to control the appearance of drawing features such as Balloons. In this lesson you will learn how to use drafting standards to control the appearance of drawing features. Weld Symbols. GB. BSI. Drafting Standards and Styles Objectives After completing this lesson. ISO. and Parts Lists. you will be able to • • • • Use Drafting Standards to control the appearance of drawing features Create and use text styles in your drawing Create and use dimension styles in your drawings Create drawing templates 390 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . and JIS. The default standard is determined by the option you select during installation and can be changed for each drawing. drafting standards. DIN.Setting Drafting Standards Overview Overview Overview Autodesk Inventor software supports ANSI.

you must save the current drawing as template in your template directory. the changes apply only to the current drawing. or create a new standard based upon one of the default standards. modify them. • • • • • • ANSI BSI DIN GB ISO JIS Access Methods Use the following method to access the Drafting Standards dialog box. Principle Default Drafting Standards The following list represents the available default drafting standards. When you create a new drawing. the default drafting standard is determined by the options chosen during installation.Drafting Standards You use the Drafting Standards dialog box to control several different drawing feature properties. Pull Down Menu Format > Drafting Standards Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 391 . If you want the changes to be available to all new drawings. When you create or modify drafting standards. You can create a new standard or modify an existing standard for the current drawing. You can use these standard as they are. Inc.

Click the [>>] button to expand the Drafting Standards dialog box. each containing different options for controlling properties stored within the drafting standard are available. Several tabs.Drafting Standards Dialog Box Select the active drafting standard or click the Click to Add area to create new drafting standard based upon one of the existing standards. Drafting Standards Dialog Box 392 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .

• Terminator Tab: This tab controls the type and size of leader and dimension terminators. • Sheet Tab: The options on this tab controls sheet specific properties such as labels and colors. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. • Common Tab: This tab controls common drawing properties such as default text style.Drafting Standard Properties Each tab in the Drafting Standards dialog box contains properties for drawing features that are stored within the drafting standard. Inc. view projection. and line properties. All Rights Reserved 393 .

The characters must be selected to be available for dimensions. • Control Frame Tab: Use the options on this tab for Control Frame properties. 394 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Unselected characters will not be available for dimensions.• Dimension Style Tab: Select the active dimension style for the current standard. Only the selected symbols will be available for GD&T features.

and Columns to be included. linetypes. Inc. All Rights Reserved 395 . and units. Heading.• Datum Target Tab: These options control Datum Target feature properties such as point size. • Parts List Tab: This tab controls Parts Lists properties such as Text Style. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

• Hatch Tab: These options set the default hatch pattern for section views. Only the selected Hatches will be available when you create new hatch areas or modify existing hatch patterns. and Offset Spacing. • Center Mark Tab: These options control the center mark properties. Balloon Type.• Balloon Tab: These options control properties for Balloon features such as Text Style. 396 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .

• Surface Texture Tab: These options control surface texture symbol properties. Only the selected symbols will be available in the drawing. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Only the selected symbols will be available when you place surface texture features. All Rights Reserved 397 . Inc. • Weld Bead Recovery Tab: This tab controls the weld bead properties for weld features.• Welding Symbols Tab: These options control weld symbol properties.

4. 3. 1. The new drafting standard will be listed among the default drafting standards and should appear selected in the Current column. In the New Standard dialog box. Click OK to close the Drafting Standards dialog box.Creating a new Drafting Standard . On the Format menu. 398 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . In the Drafting Standards dialog box. click Drafting Standards. and select the base standard from the drop-down list. select the Click to add new standard area. 2. enter a name for your standard.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating a new drafting standard. Continue to modify other properties as required.

Inc. you will need to save the current drawing containing the text style as a drawing template in your template directory. Pull Down Menu Standard Toolbar Text Styles Select to change the active text style. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. or apply a different text style to the selected text. All Rights Reserved 399 . all options will be grayed out. Access Methods Use the following methods to access Text Style related functions. Stored within the drawing.Text Styles You create and use text styles to control the appearance of text features for annotation objects in your drawings. Concept The image below represents the same text object with different text styles applied. the default text style is set within the current drafting standard. If you modify or create new text styles. These text styles are named DEFAULT-Standard Name and cannot be modified or deleted. and you want them available in other drawings. Different Text Styles Default Text Styles Note Within each drawing is a default text style for each drafting standard. If you select one of these text styles in the Text Styles dialog box.

select the line spacing for the text style. Only available for the Exactly. 400 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Size: In the drop-down list. Middle. or Multiply options. 180. Standard: In the drop-down list. select the drafting standard to display text styles. %Stretch: Specifies the width of the text. select the size for the font. Italic. select the text font for the style. or 90 degrees. 270. Style Name: Enter a name for the text style. Right. Line Spacing: In the drop-down list.Text Styles Dialog Box You can adjust the following properties for all but the DEFAULT-Standard Name text styles. or enter a new value. Top. Bottom) and color. Format/Justification/Color: Select the options to control the format (Bold. Underline). Center. Justification (Left. Rotation: Click to set the default rotation of the text. Font: In the drop-down list. 0. Value: Enter a line spacing value.

Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for applying a different text style to an annotation object.Applying a different text style . select the Text Style. Inc. Select an annotation object. 2. 1. then on the Standard toolbar. in the Style drop-down list. The selected annotation object updates to reflect the changes in the text style. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 401 .

Pull Down Menu Standard Toolbar Format > Dimension Styles Select to set the active dimension style or change the dimension style of a selected dimension. The default dimension style is set in the current drafting standard and each drafting standard includes a number of predefined dimension styles. you must save the drawing as a template or use the drawing orgranizer to copy dimension styles from an existing drawing to the current one. Concept The following image shows several dimensions applied to the geometry using different dimension styles. 402 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Each dimension contains a number of different properties that you can modify and save in a dimension style. In order to make your custom dimension styles available for other drawings. Access Methods Use the following methods to access dimension style functions. Dimension styles are stored within the drawing.Dimension Styles You create and use dimension styles to control the appearance properties of dimension objects in the drawing.

They can be used as the basis for new dimension styles by selecting the dimension style and clicking New. All Rights Reserved 403 . Using Dimension Styles As you create dimensions in your drawing. the Style drop-down list reflects the current dimension style.The Dimension Styles dialog box contains several tabs. the dimension style is only displayed when one of the dimension tools is active. Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. each with a unique set of properties that you can adjust. Dimension Styles Dialog Box Default Dimension Style Note Dimension styles named DEFAULT-Standard Name exist for each drafting standard and cannot be modified. Because the Style drop-down list is used for controlling other style related options. Select the dimension style to modify and adjust the properties as required.

Dimension Style settings supersede the Drafting Standard settings. As you place the dimension. it assumes the properties of the current dimension style. The selected style will become the current dimension style until it is changed. the rule of thumb is: • • Override settings supersede the Dimension Style settings. When a setting being changed is common to one found in the Drafting Standards or the Dimension Style dialog boxes. Overriding Dimension Styles Dimension styles can be overridden by right-clicking on the dimension and then selecting Options or Tolerance on the shortcut menu.If you want to change the current dimension style. 404 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . select a different style from the drop-down list.

Select the dimension style(s) to copy and click the Copy button. The drawing organizer works exactly like the organizer for materials. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Note Copying Dimension Styles The drawing organizer enables you to copy dimension styles from a source drawing to the current drawing. the overrides on that dimension will be lost. enter or browse for the path of the source drawing containing the dimension style. All Rights Reserved 405 .Dimension Overrides If you apply a dimension style to a dimension containing overrides. To copy a dimension style. color styles and lighting but only contains options specific to the drawing environment. Inc.

• • • • • • • Drafting Standards Dimension Styles Text Styles Sheet Formats Borders Title Blocks Sketched Symbols Access Method Use the following method to create a drawing template. The File Tab of the Options dialog box contains a field setting for the template location. Save your drawing in this location or a subfolder to make it available as a template when you create new drawings. and other settings specific to your environment. determine the location for your template files. Options Dialog Box .Drawing Templates After you modify and create custom drafting standards. you can create new drawings based on the template which will contain the custom settings created earlier. Procedure The following list represents settings or properties that are saved within a drawing template.Partial 406 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Pull Down Menu File > Save Copy As Before you save your drawing file as a template. By saving the drawing as a template. text styles. dimension styles. you should save the drawing as a template.

click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. and dimension style. Inc. You will then save the drawing as a template a create a new drawing using the new template. Drafting Standards and Styles Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Exercise: Setting Drafting Standards In this exercise. click Exercise: Setting Drafting Standards The completed exercise is shown in the following image. 2. text style. you create a new drawing and define a new drafting standard. All Rights Reserved 407 . From the Main table of contents page. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.

Drawing Resources Overview Overview Overview A typical Autodesk Inventor drawing contains several features that are not directly related to the 3D geometry they are used to represent. orientation and other options Create drawings containing predefined views by using Sheet Formats Create drawings containing multiple sheets Create sheet formats to enable you to easily create drawings containing predefined views Define a sheet border for use in future drawings Create a custom title block for use in future drawings Edit existing title blocks that are automatically placed on the drawing 408 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Features such as sheets. borders. you will be able to • • • • • • • Edit the default sheet by changing its size. In this lesson you learn how to utilize the various drawing resources available in a typical drawing environment. Drawing Created Using Drawing Resources Objectives After completing this lesson. title blocks. and views are all used to present information that meet typical drawing standards.

Exclude from count: By default each sheet is counted and its number displayed in the title block. Exclude from printing: Selecting this option will exclude the current sheet from printing when you select the All Sheets option in the Print Drawing dialog box. it is created with one default sheet. Height: Available only when Custom is selected in the Size drop-down list. enter a width for the sheet. Name: Enter a sheet name or accept the default. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. enter a height for the sheet. Orientation: Select a title block position option and the orientation of the sheet Portrait or Landscape. Width: Available only when Custom is selected in the Size drop-down list.Editing the Default Sheet When you create a new drawing. Size: Select a predefined sheet size or select the custom size option in the drop-down list. and title block position that you can edit. All Rights Reserved 409 . orientation. Procedure Access Method Use the following method to access the Edit Sheet tool. Each sheet contains properties for size. Selecting this option will exclude the current sheet from the count and thereby not counted in the title block area showing the sheet number. Shortcut Menu Right-click on the sheet in the browser > Edit Sheet Edit Sheet Dialog Box The following options are available in the Edit Sheet dialog box. Inc.

Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for editing the default sheet. 1. 410 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . In the drawing browser. right-click on the sheet and click Edit Sheet on the shortcut menu. Adjust the options as required in the Edit Sheet dialog box and click OK.Editing the Default Sheet . 3. The sheet in the graphics window and browser updates to reflect the new information. 2.

the Select Component dialog box will appear. Each sheet format will consist of one view based upon a predefined orientation such as Front and other projected views. Inc. A new sheet is created with the predefined views of the selected file. You can expand this folder to expose predefined sheet formats to automatically create pre-defined drawing views. located under the drawing resources folder in the drawing browser. Double-click on a sheet format to create a new sheet using the pre-defined sheet size and views. In the drop-down list you can select from the list of currently open Autodesk Inventor files. Access Methods Use the following method to access pre-defined sheet formats. Procedure A sheet format is defined for common sheet sizes. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. or use the Browse button to browse for the file. The view scale is set to 1 and may require editing after placement. All Rights Reserved 411 . is a Sheet Formats folder. Drawing Browser Selecting the Component When you double-click on the sheet format.Using a Sheet Format for Sheet Layout Included in each new drawing.

Pull Down Menu Drawing Browser Keyboard Shortcut Insert > Sheet Right-click in a blank area and click New Sheet SHIFT + N 412 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Access Methods Use the following methods to add new sheets to the drawing. To activate a sheet. The latter result only occurs when creating a new sheet by right-clicking in the browser and selecting New Sheet on the shortcut menu. The image below represents multiple sheets in the browser.Creating Multiple Sheets Although each new drawing is created with a single sheet. You can only view one sheet at a time. double-click on the sheet in the browser. depending on the method chosen to create the new sheet. Procedure When you create a new sheet in the drawing. you are not limited to the amount of sheets that can be included in a single drawing. you will either be presented with the New Sheet dialog box or the sheet size and properties will be duplicated from the current sheet.

Inc. Size: Select a predefined sheet size from the drop-down list. enter a height for the sheet. or click Custom to enter a custom sheet size. Height: Available only when Custom is selected in the Size drop-down list. either Portrait or Landscape. Width: Available only when Custom is selected in the Size drop-down list. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 413 . Orientation: Select the appropriate orientation option.New Sheet Dialog Box The following options are available in the New Sheet dialog box. enter a width for the sheet.

If the drawings you create utilize the same view configuration and sheet size. Drawing Browser 414 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . You can also define custom sheet formats that represent sheet sizes and view positions that are common to your drawings. it will appear in the Sheet Formats folder in the drawing browser. After you create the new sheet format.Creating Sheet Formats Each drawing contains predefined sheet formats that you can use to automatically create drawing views on a new sheet. Unlike Dimension Styles and Text Styles. Procedure Custom sheet formats are stored in the current drawing. Access Methods Use the following method to access the Create Sheet Format tool. consider creating custom sheet formats. Save the current drawing as a template to have access to the sheet formats later. sheet formats cannot be copied from another drawing using the Drawing Organizer.

Inc. 2. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Creating Sheet Formats .Create Sheet Format Dialog Box Name: Enter a sheet format name and click OK. In the browser.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating sheet formats. All Rights Reserved 415 . right-click on the sheet and select Create Sheet Format dialog box. 1. Create a drawing containing the sheet size and views common to other drawings that you create.

3. Double-click on the sheet format to use it to create new sheets. 4. Enter a descriptive name in the Create Sheet Format dialog box and click OK. Your custom sheet format will appear in the Sheet Formats folder in the browser. 416 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .

you should create a new sheet based upon the size the new border will be designed to fit. When creating a new border. Inc. To define a new border. After you create the border geometry. You can define a custom border for use on your drawings.Defining a Border Procedure • Each drawing you create will contain a Default Border item listed in the Borders folder in the drawing browser. expand the Drawing Resources and right-click on the Borders folder and click Define New Border on the shortcut menu. All Rights Reserved 417 . right-click in the graphics window and click Save Border on the shortcut menu. • • • Use standard sketching tools to sketch the border geometry. consider these two items. If you decide to create a custom border. • • Custom borders do not resize automatically if the sheet size changes. • Enter a name in the Border dialog box and click OK. The default border is used on all new sheets and can resize dynamically when the sheet size is changed. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

you must first delete the existing border from the sheet. you can double-click on a border in the Borders folder or right-click on a border and click Insert Drawing Border. or add a new sheet to the existing drawing. it will automatically contain a border. double-click on it in the browser. 418 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .• To use the new border. To insert a different border. Inserting a Border When you create a new drawing. After the border is deleted from the sheet.

right click in the graphics window and click Save Title Block on the shortcut menu. All Rights Reserved 419 . Title blocks are stored within the current drawing. while Prompted Entry fields are populated by prompting you for the values to use in the dialog box. Enter a name for the new Title Block in the Title Block dialog box. Text between < > indicates a non-static text entity. Inc. Use standard sketch tools to create the geometry and text features for the title block. some static text while others are property fields. therefore you should save the file containing the drawing as a template in order to have access to the custom title block later. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Double-click on the title block to use it on the sheet.Defining a Title Block You can define custom title blocks for use in your drawings. or Author. The new title block will be displayed in the browser under the Title Blocks folder. Procedure To define a new title block. the default title block definition displays standard sketch geometry and dimensions as well as different types of text. In the image below. Property fields are automatically populated based up file properties such as Part Number. After creating the geometry and text for the title block. right-click on the Title Blocks folder and select Define New Border on the shortcut menu. You can include special text items such as Property fields or Prompted Entry fields in the title block.

it will automatically contain a title block. or add a new sheet to the existing drawing. you must first delete the existing title block from the sheet.Inserting a Title Block When you create a new drawing. To insert a different title block. 420 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . After the title block is deleted from the sheet. you can double-click on a title block in the Title Blocks folder or right-click on a Title Block and click Insert.

In most cases the default title block will only require minimal modifications to include information required by your company. All Rights Reserved 421 . Inc.Editing Title Blocks Each drawing template will contain at least one default title block that will be placed on each new sheet in the drawing. Browser Browser Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Access Methods Use the following methods to edit a title block. title blocks are stored in the current drawing so save the drawing as a template in order to have access to the revised title block at a later date. Procedure Like other drawing resource items.

422 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . A new sheet containing the title block definition is displayed. Selecting this tool will display a different version of the Format Text dialog box as shown below. For more information on these property types refer to the Autodesk Inventor software help system. Editing Title Blocks . Format Field Text Dialog Box Select the appropriate property type based upon the text element you are creating. right-click on the title block and select Edit Definition on the shortcut menu. 2.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for editing title blocks. in order to include property fields or prompted entry items. use the Property Field tool on the Panel Bar. In the browser. 1.When you add text elements to the title block.

All Rights Reserved 423 . text. Add sketch geometry. 5. Changes to the title block definition are applied to the sheet and the title block definition in stored in drawing resources. Click Yes in the Save Edits dialog box. Inc. Right-click in the graphics window and click Save Title Block on the shortcut menu.3. and property fields as required. 4. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

click Exercise: Drawing Resources The completed exercise is shown in the following image. click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. you will use the features available in the drawing resources folder to perform common tasks in the drawing environment. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. 2.Exercise: Drawing Resources In this exercise. From the Main table of contents page. Drawing Created Using Drawing Resources 424 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .

Assembly Drawing with Projected Views Objectives After completing this lesson. All Rights Reserved 425 .Projected Views Overview Overview Overview After you complete the 3D design of your part or assembly. manufacturing will require dimensioned drawings in order to build your design. Inc. you will be able to • • • Create a base view Create projected views from the base view Edit orthographic views and understand how other projected views may be affected Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. The first step in creating production drawings is to create the required orthographic and isometric views. In this lesson you learn how to create projected views of your part or assembly files.

Creating a Base View You create a base view to begin creating orthographic views. the view is placed onto the sheet and an associative link between the drawing and the part. Access Method Use the following method to access the Base View tool. and style. or presentation file is established. The image below is a base view of a part placed in the drawing. you specify the file to be used for the view. The base view establishes the original view orientation and scale where the latter projected views will be based. Panel Bar 426 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Procedure When you create the base view. the view orientation. If the part geometry changes. assembly. those changes will reflect in the drawing. scale. After you specify this information.

assembly. If you have a part. Inc. The view label is displayed in the drawing browser. Change View Orientation: Select this icon to open the model's 3D viewing window. Move your cursor away from the dialog box to see a preview of the view before it is created.user design views. Orientation: Select the orientation for the base view. or presentation file open. All Rights Reserved 427 . this option makes the view associative to the design view. If multiple files are open. Label: Enter a label for the view or accept the default view label. it will be the default file listed. • Associative: When you create a view of an Assembly. You select the Design View to use for the initial view creation.Hidden lines are displayed. Scale from Base: Not available when you create a base view. Weldment: Available only when creating a view of an Autodesk Inventor weldment assembly. Show Scale: This option displays the scale on the sheet under the view. The standard view orientations are based upon the origin planes of the file you select. You use it when you edit projected views. you select them in the drop-down list. Show Label: This option displays the view label on the sheet under the view. This option is not available for default. Scale: Enter a scale or select a predefined scale on the flyout menu. Design View: Available only when you create a view of an Autodesk Inventor assembly.Drawing View Dialog Box File: Enter or browse for the file to create its view. You use standard view tools to define a custom view orientation. Style: Select the rendering style for the view: • Hidden Line . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

4. 428 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Create a new drawing.• • Hidden Line Removed . The base view is placed on the sheet according to the options specified. On the Panel Bar. scale. click the Base View tool.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating a base view in the drawing.Hidden lines are removed. Enter or browse for the Autodesk Inventor file to create the view and adjust the options such as orientation.View is shaded using the same colors used in the assembly or part file Creating a Base View . 3. 1. Shaded . and style. Left click on the sheet to place the view. 2.

then position each projected view. It presents no options or dialog box. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. then after the view positions have been placed. If you place the projected view to the right of the base view. right-click. it will generate an isometric view based upon the relative position from the base view. and select create on the shortcut menu. you drag the projected views to the desired position. Procedure If you select the Projected View tool you must select the base view. First Angle projection method is also available. All view positions are previewed by a bounding box prior to the views being created. Inc. it will generate a right-side projection of the base view. All Rights Reserved 429 . I you right-click on a view and select Create View > Projected. the view orientation is automatically determined based upon its position on the sheet relative to the base view.Creating Projected Views The Projected View tool enables you to create projected views from any existing view on the sheet. By default the following view properties are carried over from the base view: • • Scale Style (Orthographic Only) The following image represents a typical drawing with a base view and three projected views. Drafting Standards Projection Setting Note The description above is based upon a Third Angle projection setting in the Drafting Standards dialog box. If you place the projected view at an angle from the base view. When you create projected views.

Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating projected views. Move the cursor to the location of the projected view and left-click. 430 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . On the Panel Bar. A bounding box of the view will appear at the placement location. 2. 1.Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Create View > Projected Creating Projected Views . click the Projected View tool and select the base view.

Right-click in the graphics window and click Create on the shortcut menu.3. Continue to select positions on the sheet for projected views. 4. 5. Inc. The projected views are created based upon the positions selected on the sheet. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 431 .

these properties are linked to the base view to ensure the same scale across views. Shortcut Menu Right-click on a view and click Edit View. you can change the Scale and Style properties. Drawing View Dialog . Access Methods Use the following method to edit views. Editing a Base View While you edit a base view.Editing Projected Views After you create base and projected views. you can edit the view properties using the Drawing View dialog box.Editing a Base View 432 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . and the same rendering style. Depending on the type of view. will update to reflect the new scale factor. Base or Projected. all projected views with the Scale from Base option selected. different options are available for editing. If you change the scale factor on the base view. however while editing a projected view. On a projected view. you can edit any option that is not greyed out. you can only change these properties if you clear the options Scale from Base and/or Style from Base. Procedure When you edit a Base view.

All Rights Reserved 433 .Editing a Projected View Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. you can edit any option that is not greyed out. Clear the check mark for the Scale from Base and Style from Base options to change the view scale or rendering style. Inc. Drawing Dialog Box .Editing a Projected View While you edit a projected view.

Exercise: Projected Views In this exercise. click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. click Exercise: Projected Views The completed exercise is shown in the following image. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. From the Main table of contents page. Assembly Drawing with Projected Views 434 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . 2. you will create a new drawing and place a base view and three projected views on the sheet.

In this lesson you learn how to create section views of part and assembly drawings. Inc. important internal details are sometimes obscured by other features or parts.Section Views Overview Overview Overview When you create drawings of parts and assemblies. Features that were obstructed or displayed as hidden lines. Completed Section Views Objectives After completing this lesson. are drawn with continuous lines with hatch patterns representing the section plane. Section views enable you to better visualize these important details by removing the parts or features that are obstructing the view. All Rights Reserved 435 . you will be able to • • • Create section views in the drawing Create section views of the assembly in the drawing while controlling which parts are sectioned Edit section views by modifying the section line and editing the hatch pattern Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

Procedure Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Section View tool. you must have at least one view on the drawing on which the section line is drawn. you pick a side of the current view for the section view. Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Create View > Section 436 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . The section view is generated based upon the direction of sight in relation to the view being sectioned. In order to create a section view.Creating Section Views You create section views with the Section View tool. After drawing the section line.

Inc. endpoints. Scale: Enter a scale factor for the section view. and midpoints. When creating the section line. more difficult. • • • Hidden Line Hidden Line Removed Shaded Section Lines and Constraints When you draw the section line. Style: Select a rendering style for the view. you can hold the CTRL key down to prevent constraints from being inferred. but can also make moving the section line later. Visible: When selected the view label will be visible on the sheet. This technique is the same used to prevent constraints from being inferred in the modeling environment. 2D constraints are being inferred the same as when sketching in the 3D modeling environment.Section View Dialog Box The following options are available in the Section View dialog box. You can constrain the sketch line to elements within the drawing view such as centers. Label: Enter a label for the section view. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Constraining the section line to elements in the drawing view assist you in accurate positioning of the section line. All Rights Reserved 437 . Visible: When selected the scale factor will be visible on the sheet.

Isometric Section View Tip You can use Projected View tool to project an isometric view from a section view the same way you would project a standard view. 438 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .Follow the image sequence below to see the effect of constraints being inferred.

Note: You can draw the section line in one or more directions. click the Section View tool and select the view to be sectioned.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating section views. 1. Sketch the section line. A red border will highlight the view. After drawing the section line. right-click in the graphics window and click Continue on the shortcut menu. All Rights Reserved 439 . 3. Inc. 2.Creating Section Views . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. On the Panel Bar.

Drag the section view to one side of the view being sectioned. If necessary. 5.4. adjust the section view options in the Section View dialog box and select a point on the screen to section the view. The section view is created. 440 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. You can also control which parts are sectioned. All Rights Reserved 441 . This can be done in the graphics window or in the browser. Controlling Component Sectioning When you create a section view of an assembly drawing view. By default.Assembly Section Views When you create section views of assembly drawings. you can control which components are sectioned by right-clicking on the view being sectioned and clicking Show Contents on the shortcut menu. however you can manually turn on sectioning for standard parts. Procedure You create section views for assembly drawings using the same techniques as single part section views. each part in the assembly section view will be hatched with different properties for visual clarity as the section plane passes through each part. parts from the standard parts library are not sectioned. Inc.

you must turn off the section property on the view being sectioned. After the contents of the assembly are displayed in the drawing browser.This results in the assembly and parts being listed under the view in the browser. right-clicking on the components will present options on the shortcut menu. In order to prevent a component from being sectioned in the section view. Parts appearing with a gray icon indicate that the parts visibility is currently turned off. clear the check mark next to the Section option. Tip 442 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . To prevent a part from being sectioned. not the section view.

You can edit the section line by dragging elements of the section line to new positions. • • Constraint Drag the section line. This can only be done on elements of the section line that are not constrained to drawing geometry.Editing Section Views After you create the section view. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. modify the sketch geometry. Procedure • Right-click on the view and click Edit View on the shortcut menu. Edit the sketch used for the section line. Inc. apply dimensions to the sketch geometry. You can apply/remove constraints. it can be edited a number of ways. This will present the Drawing View dialog box enabling you to edit the view in the same way to would edit other projected views. All Rights Reserved 443 . enabling you to edit the sketch geometry in the same way you would edit sketch geometry in the modeling environment. This will present the Sketch Panel Bar.

• Editing the hatch pattern. enabling you to change the hatch pattern properties. This will present the Modify Hatch Pattern dialog box. Right click on a hatch pattern in the section view. 444 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .

click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. you will turn off sectioning for some components and edit the section by moving the section line and changing the hatch pattern applied to some components. After creating the section view. you will create section views of the assembly.Exercise: Section Views In this exercise. Completed Section Views Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. click Exercise: Section Views The completed exercise is shown in the following image. 2. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. From the Main table of contents page. Inc. All Rights Reserved 445 .

you magnify an area of the drawing while creating an associative link between the original view and the detail view. Drawing with Detail Views Objectives After completing this lesson. and apply dimensions that would otherwise be difficult to clearly show.Detail Views Overview Overview Overview As you create 2D drawings for manufacturing. you will be able to • • Create detail views to magnify areas of your drawing Edit detail views 446 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . When you create a detail view. those changes also reflect in the detail view. If the geometry being magnified. it may be necessary to magnify drawing areas to show small details. In this lesson you learn to create detail views. changes in the original view.

you are prompted to select a location for the view. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Detail View tool. the dimensions will reflect the actual geometry size. Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Create View > Detail Detail View Dialog Box The following options are available in the Detail View dialog box. Procedure The resulting view is associated with the main view and any changes effecting geometry within the detail view will be automatically reflected in the detail view. All Rights Reserved 447 . Although the view is scaled. After you select the start point. The start point of the fence is the center of the detail view. Inc. After you select the end point of the fence. you drag the cursor away from the start point which will preview the detail view circle. All geometry contained within the detail view circle will be included in the detail view. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. when you place dimensions on geometry within the view. just like other scaled views. The detail view will be positioned on the sheet at the selected point and will be scaled and labeled according to the options specified in the Detail View dialog box.Creating Detail Views You use the Detail View tool to create detail views of an existing view in the drawing. When you start the tool. you are prompted to select a view then select a start point of the fence.

1. Style: Select a rendering style for the view. click the Detail View tool. Visible: When selected the view label will be visible on the sheet. With at least one view on the drawing. Drag the detail view fence outwards and select a point that will include all required geometry within the fence circle and left click to designate the end point of the 448 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . adjust the options as required. • • • Hidden Line Hidden Line Removed Shaded Creating Detail Views . 2. Visible: When selected the scale factor will be visible on the sheet. Clicking OK will end the tool without creating the view. but do not click OK. Scale: Enter a scale factor for the detail view. 3. Select the view then select the center point of the detail view. on the Panel Bar.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating detail views. In the Detail View dialog box.Label: Enter a label for the detail view.

5. Inc. Position the detail view as required and left-click to place the view.fence circle. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. 4. The detail view is created accordingly. All Rights Reserved 449 .

It is also possible to edit the location of the view label located on the detail view circle. In the image below. Click and drag on the label to place it in a new location along the detail fence circle. The Drawing View dialog box is displayed. Procedure You can also edit the detail view by editing the fence circle used to define the area of the detail view. while selecting a grip point on the circle will enable you to change the size of the fence circle and thereby effect the area included in the detail view. If you select the detail view fence and label on the main view. and style options. Selecting the center grip point will enable you to move the fence circle. enabling you to change the scale. grip points will appear as shown in the image below. Movement of the label is restricted to be along the diameter of the circle. rightclick on the detail view and click Edit View on the shortcut menu.Editing Detail Views You can edit detail views in the same way you would edit other types of views. the detail view has been moved to a different area as well as resized. 450 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . label.

Inc. click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. All Rights Reserved 451 . 2. you create and edit detail views.Exercise: Detail Views In this exercise. From the Main table of contents page. Drawing with Detail Views Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. click Exercise: Detail Views The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Auxiliary views enable you to create additional views on the drawing that are projected at a perpendicular angle from the selected edge.Auxiliary Views Overview Overview Overview When you create drawings of parts some features on the geometry are positioned in a way that they cannot be accurately represented based upon the standard planes of projection. This results in a view that is normal to the selected edge and therefore the features along that edge are represented correctly. you will be able to: • • Create auxiliary views Edit and/or realign auxiliary views 452 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . In this lesson you learn to create auxiliary views. Drawing Containing Rotated Auxiliary Views Objectives After completing this lesson.

As a result of the feature orientation.Creating Auxiliary Views Occasionally a situation may arise in the drawing in which some features cannot be accurately represented by the standard projection planes. you can use the Auxiliary View tool to create drawing views that are projected and an angle that is perpendicular or parallel to the selected edge. Procedure To resolve this situation. you may not be able to clearly dimension and/or represent the features. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Auxiliary View tool. This situation generally occurs when features on the part lie alone planes other than the standard XYZ planes on the part. All Rights Reserved 453 . Inc. Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Create View > Auxiliary Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. creating 2D views of these features results in the features not being displayed at an angle normal to the face or feature. When this occurs.

on the Panel Bar. The Auxiliary View dialog box appears. Adjust the options as required and select an edge in the view to base the auxiliary view on. 2.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating auxiliary views. 454 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .Auxiliary View Dialog Box The following options are available in the Auxiliary View dialog. With at least one view on the sheet. 1. • • • Hidden Line Hidden Line Removed Shaded Creating Auxiliary Views . Scale: Enter a scale factor for the auxiliary view. Style: Select a rendering style for the view. Visible: When selected the view label will be visible on the sheet. Visible: When selected the scale factor will be visible on the sheet. click the Auxiliary View tool and select the view. Label: Enter a label for the auxiliary view.

The auxiliary view is created accordingly. the scale value will be the same as the selected view. 3. Drag the auxiliary view to the desired location and left-click to position the view. 4. All Rights Reserved 455 . Inc.Note: By default. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

You can right-click on the view and select Edit View to use the Drawing View dialog box to make changes to the view just as you would other projected views. you are free to move the auxiliary view anywhere on the sheet.Editing Auxiliary Views After you create the auxiliary view it can be edited in different ways. 456 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . 1. Right-click on the auxiliary view and click Alignment > Break on the shortcut menu. In this lesson you learn how to break the view alignment and realign the auxiliary view. Procedure 1. 3. By breaking the alignment of the view. finding a suitable placement on the sheet at these angles can sometimes be difficult. The following steps represent an overview for breaking the view alignment of an auxiliary view. Note the appearance of the view direction lines with labels matching the view label. You can now drag the auxiliary view to any location on the sheet. 2. 2. You can right-click on the view and select Realign Auxiliary Views to reselect the edge used to define the auxiliary view direction. Breaking the Auxiliary View Alignment One drawback to creating auxiliary views is that by restricting the view placement to be perpendicular or parallel to the selected edge. You can break the alignment of the view to position it differently on the sheet.

The following steps represent an overview for realigning an auxiliary view. One benefit to using this method to realign the view is that dimensions and annotations associated with the view will move with the view as it is realigned. Inc. Right-click on the auxiliary view and click Realign auxiliary views on the shortcut menu. In most cases these dimensions and/or annotations will need to be repositioned. All Rights Reserved 457 . 2. Select a different edge for the auxiliary view alignment.Realigning the Auxiliary View It is possible to realign the auxiliary view by reselecting the edge originally used in defining the view direction. 1. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

4.3. Reposition and/or delete the dimension and annotations as required. Drag the auxiliary view to its new position and left-click to place the view. 458 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .

Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. Drawing Containing Rotated Auxiliary Views Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 459 . you will create and edit auxiliary views on the drawing. 2.Exercise: Auxiliary Views In this exercise. Inc. From the Main table of contents page. click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. click Exercise: Auxiliary Views The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Broken Views Overview Overview Overview You use Broken views to shorten the view of elongated objects. Drawing Containing Broken Views Objectives After completing this lesson. You can use broken views when areas of the view can be removed without sacrificing the display of part features. In this lesson you learn to create broken views. you will be able to • • Use the Broken View tool to shorten elongated views Edit a broken view by moving the grip points defining the break 460 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .

When you create a broken view. slider to adjust the display scale of the break lines. Display: Use the Min. all parent or child views associated with the view being broken will also appear as broken views. Rectangular or Structural. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. The dimension value will always represent the actual length being dimensioned. Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Create View > Broken Broken View Dialog Box You can adjust the following options in the Broken View dialog box. Style: Select the break line style. If dimensions have been placed on the drawing. Procedure The image below represents a shift linkage rod displayed in a broken view format. After you create the view to be broken.Creating Broken Views You create broken views by creating a base or projected view. you use the Broken View tool to break the view. Inc./Max. the dimension lines will appear with a break symbol indicating the dimension is attached to a broken view. All Rights Reserved 461 . Gap: Enter a value for the gap between break lines on the sheet. Note the appearance of the break lines and the break symbol on the dimension.

Orientation: Click the desired orientation. Creating Broken Views . Do NOT click OK. click the Broken View tool. sets the number of structural break symbols along the break lines. Adjust the options in the Broken View dialog box as required. With at least one view on the sheet. vertical or horizontal.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating broken views.Symbols: Available only when the Structural style is selected. The area between these two points will be removed from the view. 462 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . With the Broken View dialog box still open. 1. 2. The view is broken and the area removed. select the first and second break points. on the Panel Bar. 3.

You can also resize the break by clicking and dragging on the break lines. You use the Edit View tool to change properties such as Scale. the break lines can be selected and will appear with a grip point at the center of the view as shown here. You can also edit the broken view using methods specific to broken views. Labels. This has the effect of increasing or decreasing the area being removed by the break. Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. To decrease the effective area of the view.Editing Broken Views After you create the broken view you can edit it like other views. Click and drag on the grip point to move the break to a new location. Procedure When you create a broken view. All Rights Reserved 463 . drag one break line over to the other side of the opposite break line. and Style.

Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. 2. you create and edit broken views of the shifter linkage part. From the Main table of contents page.Exercise: Broken Views In this exercise. Drawing Containing Broken Views 464 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. click Exercise: Broken Views The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

or prevent important features on the outside of the part from being ideally represented. you are cutting a window into the part or assembly to view features and/or parts that are obstructed by geometry. Drawing Containing Break Out Views Objectives After completing this lesson. Break Out views can help to alleviate this problem by limiting the section view to an area encompassed by a sketch boundary and sectioned to a specified depth. In this lesson you learn to create and edit break out views.Break Out Views Overview Overview Overview Sometimes section views remove too much information. Inc. When you create a break out view. All Rights Reserved 465 . you will be able to • • Create break out views to show internal part features Use different methods to edit a break out view Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

the sketch must be attached to the drawing view. 466 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . You can create sketches in the drawing the same way you create sketches in the modeling environment. Procedure To create break out views. But in the drawing environment you can place your sketch on the sheet. or attach it to a drawing view. When you select the view it will appear with a green bounding box.Creating Break Out Views Before you create a break out view you must sketch a closed profile representing the area to be cut from the view. To do this you select the drawing view prior to selecting the Sketch tool on the Standard toolbar. There are two methods for selecting the view prior to creating the sketch. Select the view in the drawing browser. it will appear nested under the view in the browser. • • Select the view on the sheet. As an indication that the sketch is attached to the view.

Optionally.After you create the sketch you create a closed profile representing the area to be broken out from the view. From Point: Select a point to set the depth of the break out view. Splines. click Return to exit the sketch. enter an offset value from the selected point. it will be automatically selected. Inc. Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Create View > Break Out Break Out View Dialog Box The following options are available on the Break Out View dialog box. You can select a point in the current view or an adjacent projected or parent view. Depth: Select the following options in the drop-down list. All Rights Reserved 467 . Use standard sketching tools such as Lines. If only one closed profile exists. After you create the close profile. Boundary: Select the sketch to use as the boundary for the break out view. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Break Out View tool. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. on the Standard toolbar. and Circles to create the closed profile.

To Sketch: Select a sketch line in an adjacent view to set the break out view depth. this option will break though the part in the area enclosed by the boundary. Show Hidden Edges: Temporarily displays hidden lines on a view in which they are not shown. Isometric Break Out View You can project an isometric view of a break out view in the same way you project other isometric views. To Hole: Select a hole in the current or adjacent view to set the break out view depth. Tip 468 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . This enables you to select geometry that is hidden to set the view depth. Through Part: When you create a break out view on an assembly.

aside from the standard Edit View option on the shortcut menu. you can edit the break out view using two additional methods that are unique to break out views. Edit Sketch: In the browser. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. right-click on the sketch used for the boundary to edit the sketch geometry. Procedure Edit Definition: Right-click on the Break Out View in the browser and click Edit Definition on the shortcut menu. Inc. All Rights Reserved 469 .Editing Break Out Views After you create the break out view. This will display the Break Out View dialog box enabling you to redefine how the view is created.

Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. From the Main table of contents page. click Exercise: Break Out Views The completed exercise is shown in the following image. you will edit the break out view. After creating the views. Drawing Containing Break Out Views 470 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .Exercise: Break Out Views In this exercise. you create a break out view of the part and then project an isometric view of the break out view. 2.

It is important you become proficient with managing your drawing views. in some cases copied as well as deleted. often times the views need to be moved. Drawing Containing Typical Views Objectives After completing this lesson. All Rights Reserved 471 .Managing Views and Sections Overview Overview Overview As you create drawing it is often difficult to know exactly how many sheets will be required and exactly what the best position of the views will be. As you begin to apply dimensions and other annotations to the drawing. you will be able to • • • • Use the different methods available to align drawing views Delete a drawing view from the sheet Copy a view from one sheet to another Move views in the drawing from one sheet to another Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. In this lesson you learn to manage drawing views and sections. Inc.

To realign the two views horizontally. Click the parent view for the alignment. enabling you to move the view in any direction. • • • • Horizontal .Aligning Views As you create drawing views they automatically align to the parent view from which they were projected.Aligns views vertically. right-click on the view to be aligned and click Alignment > Horizontal on the shortcut menu.Aligns views In Position. In Position . Procedure There are four options related to aligning drawing views. 2. Aligning Views Horizontally 1. The Horizontal alignment option will align the selected view horizontally with another view on the sheet. Vertical . Break . 472 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .Breaks the alignment between views.Aligns views horizontally. but there may be times when you need to change the alignment of drawing views to make better use of the available area on the sheet. In the following example the alignment between the two views has been broken.

right-click on the view to be aligned and click Alignment > Vertical on the shortcut menu. Click the parent view for the alignment. In the following example the alignment between the two views has been broken. To realign the two views vertically.3. The Vertical alignment option will align the selected view vertically with another view on the sheet. The horizontal view alignment is established. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. All Rights Reserved 473 . 2. Aligning Views Vertically 1.

The In Position alignment option will align the selected view based upon an axis that is neither vertical or horizontal. 474 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . In the following example the alignment between the two views has been broken.3. In Position Alignment 1. right-click on the view to be aligned and click Alignment > In Position on the shortcut menu. The vertical view alignment is established. To realign the two views in position.

The In Position view alignment is established. Inc. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.2. All Rights Reserved 475 . Click the parent view for the alignment. 3.

Deleting a View You can delete views from the sheet by right-clicking on View on the sheet or in the browser. you will be prompted to confirm the deletion of any existing dependent views. 476 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . and clicking Delete on the shortcut menu. Expand the Delete View dialog box and click the Yes/ No field in the Delete column. Procedure If you select a parent view for deletion.

Inc.Copy Views between Sheets You can copy a view from one sheet to another by right-clicking on the view and clicking Copy on the shortcut menu. Procedure Double-click on the destination sheet and right-click on the sheet and click Paste on the shortcut menu. All Rights Reserved 477 . The view is copied onto the other sheet and appears in the browser with a new view name. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

478 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . In the browser. Look for the position indicator showing the position of the view in the browser. Note the change in appearance of the moved view in the browser. 2. click and drag on the view being moved to the destination sheet. The selected view and all associated annotation is moved to the destination sheet. to activate the sheet of the selected view. Procedure 1.Moving Views between Sheets You can move a view from one sheet to another by dragging the view in the drawing browser. You can right-click on the views with shortcut icons and click Go To on the shortcut menu. Parent or dependent views of the moved view appear with shortcut icons with each view name indicating the sheet on which they are placed. The destination sheet is automatically activated.

copying and moving views. you will manage the drawing views by aligning. 2. Drawing Containing Typical Views Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. From the Main table of contents page. click Exercise: Managing Views and Sections The completed exercise is shown in the following image. deleting. Inc. click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.Exercise: Managing Views and Sections In this exercise. All Rights Reserved 479 .

Drawing Containing Dimensions Objectives After completing this lesson.Dimensioning a Drawing View Overview Overview Overview A requirement common to all drawings are dimensions. After you place the drawing views. In this lesson you learn how to utilize model dimensions in the drawing and how to place general dimensions. There are several different ways to place dimensions on the drawing. one of the first things you will do is begin to place the dimensions required to manufacture the part. you will be able to • • Retrieve model dimensions for use in the drawing and understand the effect of editing these dimensions in the drawing Place dimensions on the drawing using different dimensioning tools 480 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .

Select Parts: Select this option to retrieve dimensions from the entire part. Only required when you start the Retrieve Dimensions tool from the Panel Bar. When you start the tool. When possible. Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Right-click on a view and select > Retrieve Dimensions Retrieve Dimensions Dialog Box The following options are available on the Retrieve Dimensions dialog box.Retrieving Model Dimensions When you create your 3D model. Select View: Select the view to retrieve the model dimension into. You can do this on both part and assembly drawing views. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Retrieve Dimensions tool. Procedure The Retrieve Dimensions tool enables you to retrieve dimensions from the model for use in the drawing. When you retrieve model dimensions. you place parametric dimensions on sketches and features. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 481 . Only those dimensions that are selected will be retrieved. you can select the dimensions that you want to retrieve while leaving others off. you should utilize these dimensions on the drawing. Select Dimensions: Select the dimensions in the drawing view to retrieve. you select a view for the dimensions. Select Source: Select Features: Select this option to retrieve dimensions from selected features. Inc. You can only retrieve those dimensions that were created on the same plane as the selected view.

click the Retrieve Dimension tool and select the view to retrieve dimensions into.Retrieving Model Dimension . Select the Part or Features to retrieve dimensions from. On the Drawing Annotation Panel Bar. 482 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . 2.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for retrieving model dimensions into the view. 1.

Editing Model Dimensions After retrieving the model dimensions you may be required to edit the dimension's position. Click and drag on the dimension value to adjust the dimensions position. Click OK to retrieve the dimensions and close the dialog box.3. All Rights Reserved 483 . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc. 4. Only those dimensions that are selected here will be retrieved and placed in the view. The image below shows the dimensions in the positions in which they were retrieved. Click the Select Dimensions button and select the dimensions in the graphics window to retrieve.

This will present the same Edit Dimension dialog box as presented in the modeling environment.Represented below is the same area of the drawing after dragging the dimensions to new locations. 484 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Options available in the Hole Dimensions dialog box are based upon the options used when creating the hole feature. Changing Model Dimension Values If enabled during installation. you have the option of editing model dimensions while in the drawing environment. Right-click on a model dimension in the drawing and select Edit Model Dimension on the shortcut menu. Editing a hole dimension will present the following dialog box.

Inc. Constraints will be re-evaluated and the geometry will update in the 3D model and drawing to reflect the new value. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 485 . Proceed with Caution! Note When you edit model dimensions in the drawing. Changing the dimension in the drawing environment will have the same effect as changing the dimension in the modeling environment. it is important to clarify that you are indeed changing the parametric dimension of the model.After changing the dimension value. the geometry will update and the new value is reflected in the retrieved dimension.

When you place dimensions in the drawing. Autodesk Inventor will place the correct type of dimension based upon the geometry selected. Place the dimension or select another line or point to dimension to. Panel Bar Keyboard Shortcut D Placing Dimensions . horizontal. diameter. Procedure You use the same dimension tool for all types of general dimensions. click the General Dimension and select a line or point being dimensioned. 2. To place a linear type dimension. vertical. 1. on the Panel Bar. These dimensions are associative and will update to reflect correct values if changes occur on the geometry where they were applied.Placing Dimensions You place dimensions on the drawing using the same tool you use in the modeling environment. radius.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview to placing different types of dimensions in the drawing environment. and aligned. Access Methods Use the following methods to access the General Dimension tool. 486 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . the dimensions are nonparametric and do not control geometry size as in the modeling environment.

5. To change the dimension type. select a circular feature. Use this dotted preview to space your dimensions uniformly on the sheet. 4. To dimension to an apparent intersection. you are currently at the default offset spacing for the dimension. Inc. Place the dimension on the sheet. Position the dimension on the sheet. 7. To place a radial or diameter dimension. select a linear element. 6. All Rights Reserved 487 .3. When the dimension preview is dotted. right-click and select Dimension Type > Click Type of Dimension. then right-click Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. before placing the dimension.

8. Place the dimension on the sheet. 10. Select the next linear element to calculate the apparent intersection.and select Intersection on the shortcut menu. Select the endpoint or another element to end the dimension. Extension lines to the apparent intersection are 488 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . 9.

Editing Dimension Text When you place dimensions on the drawing. This will present the Format Text dialog box.automatically added. All Rights Reserved 489 . The dimension value is indicated by <<>> characters and cannot be deleted. Right-click on the dimension and click Text on the shortcut menu. User placed text can be entered before or after the dimension value placeholder. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. you can edit the text to add text to the dimension. Inc.

2. you will retrieve model dimensions into the drawing and use the General Dimension tool to add dimensions to different views. From the Main table of contents page. click Exercise: Dimensioning a Drawing View The completed exercise is shown in the following image. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings.Exercise: Dimensioning a Drawing View In this exercise. Drawing Containing Dimensions 490 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .

General Annotation Placement Overview Overview Overview Annotating a typical drawing generally consists of more than just adding dimensions to features. Drawing Containing Typical Annotation Elements Objectives After completing this lesson. Inc. you will typically have other annotation requirements such as parts lists and balloons. In this lesson you learn to use additional annotation tools such as part lists and balloons when documenting your assembly. All Rights Reserved 491 . When documenting an assembly. you will be able to • • • • • Use hole tables to annotate holes Annotate centerlines and centermarks using both manual and automatic methods Create note and leader based annotation to the drawing Add a parts list to the drawing to further annotate the assembly Add balloons to parts in the assembly drawing Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.

which are placed next to each hole. Hole Table . When you place a hole table on your drawing. Procedure Three different versions of the Hole Table tool are available: • • • Hole Table .Creates a Hole Table based upon the holes you select. and Size of each hole. you can also use Hole Tables to annotate the location and size of holes in a drawing view. The image below represents an example of a drawing view containing a series of holes. Hole Position. (b) the Hole Table containing a row for each hole including the Hole Tag.View .Creates a Hole Table of only those holes that are identical to the selected hole.Creates a Hole Table based upon all holes in the view. Although the use of each of these tools will result in a Hole Table. Panel Bar 492 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .Selected Type .0 location from which the hole locations are measured.Annotating Holes Aside from standard dimensions to annotate hole placement. and (c) the Origin Indicator which identifies the 0.Selection . accompanied by a typical hole table. each version of the tool enables you to select the holes to include using a different method. Hole Table . Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Hole Table tools. there are three main elements: (a) Hole Tags.

Select the holes to include in the table. click the Hole Table .Hole Table . All Rights Reserved 493 .Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating a hole table using the Hole Table . 2.Selection Tool . Then position the hole table on the sheet. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Selection tool. 1. 4. Inc. Position the origin indicator within the view allowing a coincident constraint to be inferred. On the Panel Bar. You can select the holes individually or by dragging a selection window around the holes to include.Selection tool and select the view containing the holes to include in the table. Right-click in the graphics window and click Create. 3.

On the Panel Bar. The Hole Table and Tags appear on the drawing.View tool and select the view containing the holes to include in the table. 3. 494 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . 2.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating a hole table with the Hole Table . Position the Hole Table on the sheet.5.View tool. Position the origin indicator within the view allowing a coincident constraint to be inferred. It is not necessary to select the holes as all holes in the view will be included in the Hole Table.View Tool . 1. click the Hole Table . Hole Table .

Right-click and select Create on the shortcut menu.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for creating a hole table using the Hole Table . All Rights Reserved 495 . Position the origin indicator within the view allowing a coincident constraint to be inferred. then position the hole table on Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. 2. Hole Table . The Hole Table and Tags appear on the sheet. Select one hole of each type you want to include in the hole table.Selected Type tool and select the view containing the holes to be included in the hole table. 1. 3. Inc. On the Panel Bar. 4.Selected Type .4.Selected Type tool. click the Hole Table .

Only the holes matching the type of hole selected are included in the hole table. Editing Hole Tables After you create the hole table. To split the hole table. Right-click on the hole table to reveal several different options to edit the appearance and information contained within the table. right-click on the row you would like to split and click Table > Split 496 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .the sheet. you can edit the table in a number of different ways. 5.

To add or remove holes from the table. Selecting Add will enable you to select another hole previously not included in the table and add it to the list.The table is split into two and can be moved to a different location. Inc. All Rights Reserved 497 . Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Selecting Remove will remove the hole in the selected row from the Hole Table. right-click on the hole table and click Row > Add or Remove.

Hides all Tags Show All Tags .Shows all Tags Right-click on the hole table and select Edit > • • Edit Tag . 498 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .You can control the visibility of hole table elements by right-clicking on the hole table and selecting Visibility > • • • • Origin . Options .Controls the visibility of the origin indicator Tag .Presents the Edit Hole Table dialog box.Controls the visibility of the selected tag.Enables you to edit the text used for the hole tag. The tag will change in the table and in the drawing view. Hide All Tags . See below for more information.

Remove properties by selecting the property in the Selected Properties list and clicking Remove. Rollup: This option combines the hole's table rows of the same type in the hole table. Available Properties: Select the available properties to include in the list by selecting the property and clicking the Add button. Move Up/Move Down: Adjust the order of the selected properties. Inc. Selected Properties: Lists the currently selected properties appearing as columns in the table. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. You cannot delete a default column New Field: Select to create a custom column that you can use to add data to the hole table. Only the first hole of each hole type is listed in the table. or None. Bottom. Line Weight: Enter line weights and colors for the table. Select the inside or outside button to set properties for each. The position in the list represents the order of columns in the table left to right. All Rights Reserved 499 .Edit Hole Table Dialog Box The following options are available in the Edit Hole Table dialog box. Combine Notes: This option combines the notes cells for identical holes. Numbering: This option replaces the alphanumeric tags with sequential hole numbers. Delete: Select to delete a custom column. Title Position: Select a title position of Top.

Right-click on a view and select Automated Centerlines from the shortcut menu. The Centerline Settings dialog box enables you to set various criteria for the automated centerlines. 500 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . Only the features matching the type(s) selected and meeting the threshold settings will receive automatic centerlines. Procedure Access Methods Use the following methods to access centerline and centermark tools. You can place these annotations manually using the different tools available or place them automatically using the Automated Centerline tool.Annotating Centerlines and Center Marks Several tools are available to annotate your drawing with centerlines and centermarks. Panel Bar Shortcut Menu Right-click on a view and select Automated Centerlines Placing Centerlines and Center Marks Automatically You can place centerlines and centermarks automatically in a view by using the Automated Centerline tool.

Precision: Set the precision to be used when analyzing the features against the threshold values. click Document Settings. Inc.Centerline Settings Apply To: Select the types of features you would like to automatically apply centerlines or centermarks Projection: Select the view projection. Threshold: • • • Fillet: Set the minimum and maximum thresholds for fillets to receive automatic centerlines. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 501 . Note: These settings can also be set in the Document Settings for the drawing. On the Tools menu. Setting these options in the Document Settings will store the settings in the drawing or template. Circular Edges: Set the minimum and maximum thresholds for circular edges to receive automatic centerlines. then click the Drawing Tab and select the Automated Centerline Settings button. alleviating the task of having to set these options each time.

3.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for applying centerlines automatically to a drawing view. 2. Right-click on the drawing view and click Automated Centerlines. The automatic centerlines are applied to features matching the selected type and threshold settings. Adjust the feature type and threshold options and click OK. 502 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . 1.Creating Automatic Centerlines .

4. Inc. click the Center Mark tool.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for using the Center Mark tool. All Rights Reserved 503 . 2. The center mark is added to the drawing view. On the Panel Bar. Select a circular shape or feature. Continue selecting circular features or right-click and select Done. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. 3. 1.Using the Center Mark Tool .

Using the Centerline Tool . On the Panel Bar. The midpoint of the edge is automatically calculated. Again the midpoint of the edge is automatically calculated. Then centerline is created passing through the midpoint of each selected edge. 1. 2. Right-click in the graphics window and click Create on the shortcut menu. Select the next edge for the centerline to pass through. 504 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . click the Centerline tool and select an edge. 3.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for using the Centerline tool to add centerlines to your drawing view.

The centerline is calculated and drawn by bisecting the angle of the two edges selected.Using the Centerline Bisector Tool . click the Centerline Bisector tool and select the first edge to bisect.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for using the Centerline Bisector tool to add centerlines to your drawing views. All Rights Reserved 505 . 1. 3. 2. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. On the Panel Bar. Inc. Select the second edge.

Select the features of the pattern. 3. 1. 4. the circular centerline will appear. then right-click and select Create on the shortcut menu. As soon as you select two features. Continue selecting features as required. click the Centered Pattern tool. Click the location representing the center of the pattern. On the Panel Bar.Using the Centered Pattern Tool . 2.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for using the Centered Pattern tool to place centerlines on your drawing view. 506 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .

and width as required. color. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Format Text Dialog Box The following options are available in the Format Text dialog box.Notes and Leaders You use the Text and Leader Text tools to add notes and leaders to the drawing views.Select the component to be used for parameters. The leaders are associative to the view and will move if the view moves. All Rights Reserved 507 . use the Format Text dialog box to add text to your drawing. the Leader Text tool attaches a leader with text to the geometry within the view. While you use the Text tool to place paragraph style text on the sheet. Style: Select a text style for the text or accept the default text style listed. Procedure Access Methods Use the following methods to access the Text and Leader Text tools. Panel Bar Panel Bar Common to both the Text and Leader Text tools. Text Format: Adjust the text formatting options such as justification. Component: Optional . Inc.

Source: Optional - Select Model Parameters or User Parameters. Parameter: Optional - Select the parameter to use in the text. Precision: Optional - Enter a precision for the parameter value. d0 Button: Optional - Click to add the selected parameter to the text window. Text Font: Select a font from the drop-down list. Height: Enter or select a text height. If you enter a text height once, it will be available in the list for future text in this drawing. Symbols Flyout: Select a special symbol to insert into the text.

Adding Text - Process Overview
The following steps represent an overview for adding text to the drawing. 1. On the Panel Bar, click the Text tool and click and drag the rectangle text boundary.

2.

In the Format Text dialog box, enter the text, adjust options as required and click OK.

Adding Leader Text - Process Overview
The following steps represent an overview for adding leader text to your drawing.

508

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings

1.

On the Panel Bar, click the Leader Text tool then select a start point and second point for the leader.

2.

Right-click in the graphics window and click Continue on the shortcut menu.

3.

Enter the text for the leader and click OK.

4.

The leader text is attached to the drawing geometry.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

509

Editing Text
Right-click on a text object to access text editing options.

Text Shortcut Menu

Edit Text: Displays the Format Text dialog box. Rotate 90 CW: Rotates the selected text 90 degrees clockwise. Rotate 90 CCW: Rotates the selected text 90 degrees counter clockwise.

Editing Leader Text
Right-click on a leader text object to access the text editing options.

Leader Text Shortcut Menu Options

Edit Leader Text: Displays the Format Text dialog box. Edit Arrowhead: Displays the Change Arrowhead dialog box. In the drop-down list, select a different arrowhead. Add Vertex / Leader: Select to add a vertex to the leader. Delete Leader: Select this option to delete the leader.

510

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings

Parts Lists
You use Parts lists to annotate an assembly drawing by creating a table of parts included in the drawing. When you create a parts list you must first select a view. The parts list is based upon components in the selected view.
Procedure

Access Methods
Using the following method to access the Parts List tool. Panel Bar

The first time you create a parts list or balloon on the drawing you are presented with the Parts List - Item Numbering dialog box. The options in this dialog box enable you to control which components appear in the Parts List and how they are numbered. The options you choose apply to all parts lists and balloons in the drawing. The options in this dialog box are only set once in the current drawing, unless all balloons and parts lists are deleted.

Parts List - Item Numbering Dialog Box

The following options are available and can be edited. First-Level Components: This option numbers all first-level parts and subassemblies. You can display parts residing within a subassembly in the parts list and their numbers will be prefixed with the number of the item number of the subassembly. For example, if a subassembly in the parts list has an item number of 2, the parts residing within the parts list will be numbered 2.1, 2.2, and 2.3. Only Parts: This option numbers all first-level parts and parts within subassemblies, using standard item numbers. Subassemblies will not be listed or numbered in the parts list table.
Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

511

All: When selected, all parts in the assembly are numbered and listed. Not applicable or available when ballooning. Items: Only available when the Only Parts level option is chosen, enter a range of parts to include in the parts list. Valid syntax is as follows: Not applicable or available when ballooning. • Entering 1-4,6,8,10 - would list items 1-4 and items 6, 8, and 10 in the assembly.

Table Wrapping: The following section is not available when ballooning. Number of Sections: Enter the number of sections to wrap the table. For example, if you enter 2, a 10 part list will be wrapped into two columns with 5 rows each. Direction to Wrap Table: Select the direction to wrap the table, left or right.

Creating a Parts List - Process Overview
The following steps represent an overview for adding a parts list to your drawing. 1. On the Panel Bar, click the Parts List tool and select a drawing view.

2.

Adjust the options in the Parts-List - Item Numbering dialog box as required and click OK.

3.

Left-click to position the parts list on the drawing.

512

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings

4.

The parts list appears on the drawing.

Editing Parts Lists
After you create the parts list you can edit it to add/remove columns, merge rows, expand the display of subassemblies, and change other properties that control the display and content of the parts list. To edit a parts list, right-click on the parts list and select Edit Parts List on the shortcut menu.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

513

The Edit Parts List dialog box enables you to modify several different properties of the parts list. For more information on editing a parts list, refer to the Autodesk Inventor Help system.

Edit Parts List Dialog Box

To add a column to the parts list, click the Column Chooser button. This will display the Parts List Column Chooser dialog box. Select from the available properties and click the ADD button to add the property to the selected property list.

Click OK to exit each dialog box. The new column will appear in the parts list on the drawing.

514

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings

Updating the Parts List
If changes occur in the assembly model being referenced by the parts list, the parts list may not automatically update. If the parts list requires an update, it is indicated by a red lightning bolt next to the parts list in the drawing browser. Right-click on the parts list in the browser or graphics window and click Update on the shortcut menu.

Note: Updating the parts list will remove any information manually input into the parts list columns or cells that have not been frozen. To protect a cell from being overwritten, in the Edit Parts List dialog box, right-click on the cell and select Freeze Value on the shortcut menu.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

515

Placing Balloons
You place balloons on assembly drawings to identify parts in the drawing and relate them to rows in the parts list. When you place a balloon on a part, the item number of the part will appear in the balloon. This item number is the same item number used in the parts list.
Procedure

Balloons and parts lists are associative. If an item number in the parts list changes, the change will also be reflected in the balloon. This associativity is unidirectional only. If you override the item number in the balloon, the new value is not reflected in the parts list.

Access Methods
Use the following methods to access the Balloon and Balloon All tools. Panel Bar

Keyboard Shortcut

B

The first time you create a parts list or balloon on the drawing you are presented with the Parts List - Item Numbering dialog box. The options in this dialog box enable you to control which components appear in the Parts List and how they are numbered. The options you choose apply to all parts lists and balloons in the drawing. The options in this dialog box are only set once in the current drawing, unless all balloons and parts lists are deleted.

516

Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings

Parts List - Item Numbering Dialog Box

The following options are available and can be edited. First-Level Components: This option numbers all first-level parts and subassemblies. You can display parts residing within a subassembly in the parts list and their numbers will be prefixed with the number of the item number of the subassembly. For example, if a subassembly in the parts list has an item number of 2, the parts residing within the parts list will be numbered 2.1, 2.2, and 2.3. Only Parts: This option numbers all first-level parts and parts within subassemblies, using standard item numbers. Subassemblies will not be listed or numbered in the parts list table. All: When selected, all parts in the assembly are numbered and listed. Not applicable or available when ballooning. Items: Only available when the Only Parts level option is chosen, enter a range of parts to include in the parts list. Valid syntax is as follows: Not applicable or available when ballooning. • Entering 1-4,6,8,10 - would list items 1-4 and items 6, 8, and 10 in the assembly.

Table Wrapping: The following section is not available when ballooning. Number of Sections: Enter the number of sections to wrap the table. For example, if you enter 2, a 10 part list will be wrapped into two columns with 5 rows each. Direction to Wrap Table: Select the direction to wrap the table, left or right.

Copyright © 2004 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved

517

Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for placing individual balloons on your drawing. Adjust the options as required and click OK. 1. and there is no parts list in the drawing.Item Numbering dialog box will appear. 2. Continue selecting component and placing balloons as required. 3. If this is the first balloon. 518 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . click the Balloon tool and select a component in the drawing view. Right-click in the graphics window and click Done when completed.Placing Individual Balloons . On the Panel Bar. Left-click to position the balloon then. right-click and select Continue on the shortcut menu. the Parts List .

On the Panel Bar. All Rights Reserved 519 .Item Numbering dialog box will appear. 2. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Adjust the options as required and click OK. the Parts List . Click and drag on each balloon to reposition them as required. Note: Balloons are only placed on the first occurrence of each part.Process Overview The following steps represent an overview for using the Balloon All tool to balloon all components in the drawing view at once. If there is no parts list in the drawing. You will also have to manually adjust the position of the balloons. Inc.Placing Balloons Using the Balloon All Tool . The balloons are automatically applied to the assembly components. 3. click the Balloon All tool and select a drawing view. 1.

you can edit them by right-clicking on the balloon and selecting Edit Balloon on the shortcut menu. Note: If you override the balloon value. To use the override value. select the cell and click OK Click the Item cell to use the original item number in the balloon. the new value is not reflected in the Parts List. 520 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . as well as override the balloon value. Symbols: If your drawing contains sketched symbols. Balloon Value: Enter an override value in the override column. The Edit Balloon dialog box enables you to change the balloon type. Balloon Type: Clear this option in order to select a different balloon type.Editing Balloons After you place the balloons on the sheet. you can select a sketched symbol to use for the balloon.

leaders. notes. you open the drawing file and use the tools learned in this lesson to annotate the drawing with centerlines. Inc. parts lists and balloons. Print Exercise Reference To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. 2. Drawing Containing Typical Annotation Elements Copyright © 2004 Autodesk.Exercise: General Annotation Placement In this exercise. click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. All Rights Reserved 521 . From the Main table of contents page. click Exercise: General Annotation Placement The completed exercise is shown in the following image.

Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Drawings Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Drawings Print Exercise Reference In this exercise. From the Main table of contents page. You will edit the drawing by modifying or creating views. you will open a drawing and assume this drawing must meet your own company standards. click Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings From the table of contents for Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings. dimensions styles and any other properties that would be required to complete the drawing to your company's standards. click Challenge Exercise: Introduction to Drawings The completed exercise is shown in the following image. Challenge Exercise Drawing 522 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings . drawing standards. annotation. To navigate to the exercise in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1. title blocks. 2.

How to create section views of parts and assemblies. How to create sketch geometry representing the section path and how to project isometric section views. How to create and use text styles and dimension styles. How to create and edit broken views on your sheet. You also learned how the available options in the Broken View dialog box can effect the view as it is created. How to create and edit base views and projected views. area effected. How to manage drawing views and sections by adjusting the alignment options as required. All Rights Reserved 523 . You learned about the options available in the Break Out View dialog box and how to use these options to generate the required view. How to delete drawing views and copy and/or move views from one sheet to another in the current drawing.Chapter Summary Summary You learned the following in this chapter: Summary • • • • • • • • • How to create and utilize drafting standards. How to apply different types of annotation objects to your drawing. How to save text and dimension styles within a drawing template for later use. How to create and edit auxiliary views. How to place additional reference dimensions on the sheet. How to perform several functions related to managing drawing resources. How to retrieve model dimensions for use in the drawing. How to magnify a specific area on your drawing by creating detail views. • • • • • • • • Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. and annotation associated with the detail view. Inc. You also learned how to edit these views by changing the scale. How to create and edit Break Out views. The options available in the Drawing View dialog box and how they effect the drawing views when you create them.

524 Chapter 7: Introduction to Drawings .

click Overview Review the goals for the exercise and use the navigation buttons in the Electronic Student Workbook to work through the exercises.. • Create an assembly based on parameters defined in a 2D drawing. You can find guidelines to aid in completing the models for the drawing files using the Electronic Student Workbook. 3.. • • • . click Chapter 8: Project Exercise From the table of contents for Chapter 8: Project Exercise. 2. In this chapter After completing this chapter. To navigate to the exercises in the Electronic Student Workbook: 1.Project Exercise Review the goals and images of the drawings that follow. you will be able to. Create and assemble a number of parts based on parameters defined in 2D drawings. Create 2D documentation on a created assembly file. From the Main table of contents page. Create a presentation file that documents assembly instructions for a completed assembly.

you create the assembly model for the ICU. Completed Irrigation Control Unit Objectives This all-inclusive exercise requires more than the design of a single part. The approach shown here is intended to illustrate the use of Autodesk Inventor software for modeling. During this process you assembly the parts you design. You will design each part of the Irrigation Control Unit (ICU) from scratch. After you model and detail each part. perform interference detection. 526 Chapter 8: Project Exercise . calculate mass properties. and generating drawings of individual parts and the assembly of those parts.Irrigation Control Unit Overview Overview Overview In this exercise you build the Irrigation Control Unit shown below. The approach outlined in this exercise is not the only way to approach the design of this Irrigation Control Unit. and a bill of materials. assembly instructions. and generate a drawing of the assembly showing part interaction. It incorporates the design and documentation of seven separate parts and an assembly of 14 components. analyzing.

Components (other than the rubber O-Rings) must not interfere. All parts must be created in Metric (mm) units. You will gain the greatest benefit from this exercise by completing the design and documentation of each part as well as the assembly. Design Goals The Irrigation Control Unit documented in this project controls the flow of a solution to two separate locations through the use of Right and Left Buttons. but should take no longer than 6-8 hours. The following is a list of goals or rules for the creation of the Irrigation Control Unit. the solution from the main flow tube of the ICU flows through the exit tube. All Rights Reserved 527 . or both gates provided in the Valves and out the exit tubes.The average time required to complete this exercise varies. Inc. • • • • All parts must be fully parametric and have individual part drawings. Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. the solution flows through the right. the solution from the main flow tube is restricted from flowing through the Valve and out the exit tubes. Individual part design goals are provided as that portion of the exercise is presented to you. This list describes your design criteria for the entire ICU exercise. left. When the Valve is in the open position. When a button is pressed. When the Valve is in the closed position. Parts must be designed to match the following drawings. By completing this exercise you will explore the following Autodesk Inventor capabilities: Using Feature Patterns Defining Tapped Holes Using Hole Notes Using Parameters and Linking Mirroring Parts Using Construction Lines Part Drawing Creation Presentation File Creation Attaching Balloons to Components Generating Mass Properties Assembly Drawing Creation Constraining Components Using Projected Edges Copying Sketches Using To-Face Terminations Shelling Parts Interference Detection Tweaking and Applying Trails Generating a Bill of Materials Part Modification in an Assembly It is recommended that you create all of the parts contained in the Irrigation Control Unit by following the instructions in this exercise. Solution flow is controlled by Valves located in the main cavities of the ICU.

Irrigation Control Unit .Closed Position 528 Chapter 8: Project Exercise .

Inc.Open Position Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 529 .Irrigation Control Unit .

Valve Housing 530 Chapter 8: Project Exercise .

Completed Irrigation Control Unit Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. All Rights Reserved 531 . Inc.

Valve 532 Chapter 8: Project Exercise .

All Rights Reserved 533 .Left and Right Buttons Copyright © 2004 Autodesk. Inc.

534 Chapter 8: Project Exercise .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful